TI TMS320F28020PTT

TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Piccolo Microcontrollers
Check for
Samples: TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022, TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
1 TMS320F2802x, TMS320F2802xx ( Piccolo™) MCUs
1.1
Features
123
• Highlights
– High-Efficiency 32-Bit CPU ( TMS320C28x™)
– 60-MHz, 50-MHz, and 40-MHz Devices
– Single 3.3-V Supply
– Integrated Power-on and Brown-out Resets
– Two Internal Zero-pin Oscillators
– Up to 22 Multiplexed GPIO Pins
– Three 32-Bit CPU Timers
– On-Chip Flash, SARAM, OTP Memory
– Code-security Module
– Serial Port Peripherals (SCI/SPI/I2C)
– Enhanced Control Peripherals
• Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM)
• High-Resolution PWM (HRPWM)
• Enhanced Capture (eCAP)
• Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
• On-Chip Temperature Sensor
• Comparator
– 38-Pin and 48-Pin Packages
• High-Efficiency 32-Bit CPU ( TMS320C28x™)
– 60 MHz (16.67-ns Cycle Time)
– 50 MHz (20-ns Cycle Time)
– 40 MHz (25-ns Cycle Time)
– 16 x 16 and 32 x 32 MAC Operations
– 16 x 16 Dual MAC
– Harvard Bus Architecture
– Atomic Operations
– Fast Interrupt Response and Processing
– Unified Memory Programming Model
– Code-Efficient (in C/C++ and Assembly)
• Low Device and System Cost:
– Single 3.3-V Supply
– No Power Sequencing Requirement
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Integrated Power-on and Brown-out Resets
– Small Packaging, as Low as 38-Pin Available
– Low Power
– No Analog Support Pins
Clocking:
– Two Internal Zero-pin Oscillators
– On-Chip Crystal Oscillator/External Clock
Input
– Dynamic PLL Ratio Changes Supported
– Watchdog Timer Module
– Missing Clock Detection Circuitry
Up to 22 Individually Programmable,
Multiplexed GPIO Pins With Input Filtering
Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Block That
Supports All Peripheral Interrupts
Three 32-Bit CPU Timers
Independent 16-Bit Timer in Each ePWM
Module
On-Chip Memory
– Flash, SARAM, OTP, Boot ROM Available
128-Bit Security Key/Lock
– Protects Secure Memory Blocks
– Prevents Firmware Reverse Engineering
Serial Port Peripherals
– One SCI (UART) Module
– One SPI Module
– One Inter-Integrated-Circuit (I2C) Bus
Advanced Emulation Features
– Analysis and Breakpoint Functions
– Real-Time Debug via Hardware
2802x, 2802xx Packages
– 38-Pin DA Plastic Small-Outline Package
(PSOP)
– 48-Pin PT Plastic Quad Flatpack (PQFP)
1
2
3
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
Piccolo, TMS320C28x, C28x, TMS320C2000, Code Composer Studio, XDS510, XDS560 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not
necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
1.2
www.ti.com
Description
The F2802x Piccolo™ family of microcontrollers provides the power of the C28x™ core coupled with
highly integrated control peripherals in low pin-count devices. This family is code-compatible with previous
C28x-based code, as well as providing a high level of analog integration.
An internal voltage regulator allows for single rail operation. Enhancements have been made to the
HRPWM module to allow for dual-edge control (frequency modulation). Analog comparators with internal
10-bit references have been added and can be routed directly to control the PWM outputs. The ADC
converts from 0 to 3.3-V fixed full scale range and supports ratio-metric VREFHI/VREFLO references. The
ADC interface has been optimized for low overhead/latency.
1.3
Getting Started
This section gives a brief overview of the steps to take when first developing for a C28x device. For more
detail on each of these steps, see the following:
• Getting Started With TMS320C28x Digital Signal Controllers (literature number SPRAAM0).
• C2000 Getting Started Website (http://www.ti.com/c2000getstarted)
• TMS320F28x MCU Development and Experimenter's Kits (http://www.ti.com/f28xkits)
2
TMS320F2802x, TMS320F2802xx ( Piccolo™) MCUs
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
1
TMS320F2802x, TMS320F2802xx ( Piccolo™)
MCUs ...................................................... 1
1.1
3
4
Features .............................................. 1
........................................... 2
1.3
Getting Started ....................................... 2
Introduction .............................................. 4
2.1
Pin Assignments ..................................... 6
2.2
Signal Descriptions .................................. 8
Functional Overview .................................. 13
3.1
Block Diagram ...................................... 13
3.2
Memory Maps ...................................... 14
3.3
Brief Descriptions ................................... 22
3.4
Register Map ....................................... 30
3.5
Device Emulation Registers ........................ 31
3.6
Interrupts ............................................ 32
3.7
VREG/BOR/POR ................................... 36
3.8
System Control ..................................... 38
3.9
Low-power Modes Block ........................... 46
Peripherals .............................................. 47
4.1
Analog Block ........................................ 47
4.2
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Module ........... 53
4.3
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module .... 56
4.4
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ........................ 59
4.5
Enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM1/2/3/4) .......... 61
4.6
High-Resolution PWM (HRPWM) .................. 65
1.2
2
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Description
5
6
...............
..........................................
4.9
GPIO MUX ..........................................
Device Support .........................................
4.7
Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP1)
66
4.8
JTAG Port
68
5.1
Device and Development Support Tool
Nomenclature ....................................... 74
5.2
Related Documentation ............................. 76
5.3
Community Resources
77
Electrical Specifications
78
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
.............................
.............................
Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................
Recommended Operating Conditions ..............
Electrical Characteristics ...........................
Current Consumption ...............................
Thermal Design Considerations ....................
79
80
85
Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for
the MCU ............................................ 85
Timing Parameter Symbology
Contents
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
78
78
...................... 86
6.8
Clock Requirements and Characteristics ........... 90
6.9
Power Sequencing ................................. 91
6.10 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............. 93
6.11 Enhanced Control Peripherals .................... 100
6.12 Detailed Descriptions .............................. 118
6.13 Flash Timing ....................................... 119
Revision History ...................................... 121
Thermal/Mechanical Data .......................... 123
6.7
7
8
69
74
3
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
2 Introduction
Table 2-1 lists the features of the TMS320F2802x devices.
4
Introduction
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 2-1. Hardware Features
FEATURE
28027
(60 MHz)
TYPE(1)
38-Pin DA
PSOP
Package Type
28026
(60 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
28023
(50 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
28022
(50 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
28021
(40 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
28020
(40 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
280200
(40 MHz)
48-Pin PT
PQFP
38-Pin DA
PSOP
48-Pin PT
PQFP
Instruction cycle
–
16.67 ns
16.67 ns
20 ns
20 ns
25 ns
25 ns
25 ns
On-chip flash (16-bit word)
–
32K
16K
32K
16K
32K
16K
8K
On-chip SARAM (16-bit word)
–
6K
6K
6K
6K
5K
3K
3K
Code security for on-chip
flash/SARAM/OTP blocks
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Boot ROM (8K x 16)
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
One-time programmable (OTP) ROM
(16-bit word)
–
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
1K
ePWM outputs
1
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
8 (ePWM1/2/3/4)
eCAP inputs
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
–
Watchdog timer
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MSPS
Conversion Time
12-Bit ADC
Channels
3
4.6
4.6
3
3
2
2
2
216.67 ns
216.67 ns
325 ns
325 ns
500 ns
500 ns
500 ns
7
Temperature Sensor
Dual Sample-and-Hold
13
7
13
7
13
7
13
7
13
7
13
7
13
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
32-Bit CPU timers
–
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
High-resolution ePWM Channels
1
4 (ePWM1A/2A/3A/4A)
4 (ePWM1A/2A/3A/4A)
4 (ePWM1A/2A/3A/4A)
4 (ePWM1A/2A/3A/4A)
–
–
Comparators w/ Integrated DACs
0
Inter-integrated circuit (I2C)
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Digital (GPIO)
–
Analog (AIO)
–
1
2
20
22
1
2
20
22
1
2
20
22
1
2
20
22
1
2
20
22
1
–
2
20
1
2
1
22
20
22
I/O pins (shared)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
External interrupts
–
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Supply voltage (nominal)
–
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
Temperature
options
Product status(3)
T: –40°C to 105°C
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
S: –40°C to 125°C
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Q: –40°C to 125°C(2)
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
TMS
TMS
TMS
TMS
TMS
TMS
–
TMS
(1) A type change represents a major functional feature difference in a peripheral module. Within a peripheral type, there may be minor differences between devices that do not affect the
basic functionality of the module. These device-specific differences are listed in the TMS320x28xx, 28xxx DSP Peripheral Reference Guide (literature number SPRU566) and in the
peripheral reference guides.
(2) "Q" refers to Q100 qualification for automotive applications.
(3) See Section 5.1, Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature for descriptions of device stages. The "TMS" product status denotes a fully qualified production device.
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Introduction
5
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
2.1
www.ti.com
Pin Assignments
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
GPIO33/SCLA/EPWMSYNCO/ADCSOCBO
VDDIO
VREGENZ
VSS
VDD
GPIO32/SDAA/EPWMSYNCI/ADCSOCAO
TEST
GPIO0/EPWM1A
GPIO1/EPWM1B/COMP1OUT
GPIO16/SPISIMOA/TZ2
GPIO17/SPISOMIA/TZ3
GPIO19/XCLKIN/SPISTEA/SCIRXDA/ECAP1
Figure 2-1 shows the 48-pin PT plastic quad flatpack (PQFP) pin assignments. Figure 2-2 shows the
38-pin DA plastic small outline package (PSOP) pin assignments.
GPIO2/EPWM2A
GPIO3/EPWM2B/COMP2OUT
GPIO4/EPWM3A
GPIO5/EPWM3B/ECAP1
GPIO6/EPWM4A/EPWMSYNCI/EPWMSYNCO
GPIO7/EPWM4B/SCIRXDA
VDD
VSS
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
GPIO18/SPICLKA/SCITXDA/XCLKOUT
GPIO38/XCLKIN (TCK)
GPIO37 (TDO)
GPIO36 (TMS)
GPIO35 (TDI)
GPIO34/COMP2OUT
ADCINB7
ADCINB6/AIO14
ADCINB4/COMP2B/AIO12
ADCINB3
ADCINB2/COMP1B/AIO10
ADCINB1
TRST
XRS
ADCINA6/AIO6
ADCINA4/COMP2A/AIO4
ADCINA7
ADCINA3
ADCINA1
ADCINA2/COMP1A/AIO2
ADCINA0/VREFHI
VDDA
VSSA/VREFLO
GPIO29/SCITXDA/SCLA/TZ3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
X1
X2
GPIO12/TZ1/SCITXDA
GPIO28/SCIRXDA/SDAA/TZ2
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Figure 2-1. 2802x 48-Pin PT PQFP (Top View)
6
Introduction
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
VDD
VSS
VREGENZ
VDDIO
GPIO2/EPWM2A
GPIO3/EPWM2B
GPIO4/EPWM3A
GPIO5/EPWM3B/ECAP1
GPIO6/EPWM4A/EPWMSYNCI/EPWMSYNCO
GPIO7/EPWM4B/SCIRXDA
VDD
VSS
GPIO12/TZ1/SCITXDA
GPIO28/SCIRXDA/SDAA/TZ2
GPIO29/SCITXDA/SCLA/TZ3
TRST
XRS
ADCINA6/AIO6
ADCINA4/AIO4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
TEST
GPIO0/EPWM1A
GPIO1/EPWM1B/COMP1OUT
GPIO16/SPISIMOA/TZ2
GPIO17/SPISOMIA/TZ3
GPIO19/XCLKIN/SPISTEA/SCIRXDA/ECAP1
GPIO18/SPICLKA/SCITXDA/XCLKOUT
GPIO38/XCLKIN (TCK)
GPIO37 (TDO)
GPIO36 (TMS)
GPIO35 (TDI)
GPIO34
ADCINB6/AIO14
ADCINB4/AIO12
ADCINB2/COMP1B/AIO10
VSSA/VREFLO
VDDA
ADCINA0/VREFHI
ADCINA2/COMP1A/AIO2
Figure 2-2. 2802x 38-Pin DA PSOP (Top View)
Introduction
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
7
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
2.2
www.ti.com
Signal Descriptions
Table 2-2 describes the signals. With the exception of the JTAG pins, the GPIO function is the default at
reset, unless otherwise mentioned. The peripheral signals that are listed under them are alternate
functions. Some peripheral functions may not be available in all devices. See Table 2-1 for details. Inputs
are not 5-V tolerant. All GPIO pins are I/O/Z and have an internal pullup, which can be selectively
enabled/disabled on a per-pin basis. This feature only applies to the GPIO pins. The pullups on the PWM
pins are not enabled at reset. The pullups on other GPIO pins are enabled upon reset. The AIO pins do
not have an internal pullup.
NOTE: When the on-chip VREG is used, the GPIO19, GPIO34, GPIO35, GPIO36, GPIO37, and GPIO38
pins could glitch during power up. If this is unacceptable in an application, 1.8 V could be supplied
externally. There is no power-sequencing requirement when using an external 1.8-V supply. However, if
the 3.3-V transistors in the level-shifting output buffers of the I/O pins are powered prior to the 1.9-V
transistors, it is possible for the output buffers to turn on, causing a glitch to occur on the pin during power
up. To avoid this behavior, power the VDD pins prior to or simultaneously with the VDDIO pins, ensuring that
the VDD pins have reached 0.7 V before the VDDIO pins reach 0.7 V.
Table 2-2. TERMINAL FUNCTIONS (1)
TERMINAL
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
16
I
JTAG test reset with internal pulldown. TRST, when driven high, gives the scan
system control of the operations of the device. If this signal is not connected or driven
low, the device operates in its functional mode, and the test reset signals are ignored.
NOTE: TRST is an active high test pin and must be maintained low at all times during
normal device operation. An external pulldown resistor is required on this pin. The
value of this resistor should be based on drive strength of the debugger pods
applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ resistor generally offers adequate protection. Since
this is application-specific, it is recommended that each target board be validated for
proper operation of the debugger and the application. (↓)
TCK
See GPIO38
I
See GPIO38. JTAG test clock with internal pullup (↑)
TMS
See GPIO36
I
See GPIO36. JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control
input is clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK. (↑)
TDI
See GPIO35
I
See GPIO35. JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the
selected register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK. (↑)
TDO
See GPIO37
O/Z
See GPIO37. JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected
register (instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK.
(8-mA drive)
NAME
PT
PIN #
DA
PIN #
JTAG
TRST
2
FLASH
TEST
30
38
I/O
Test Pin. Reserved for TI. Must be left unconnected.
O/Z
See GPIO18. Output clock derived from SYSCLKOUT. XCLKOUT is either the same
frequency, one-half the frequency, or one-fourth the frequency of SYSCLKOUT. This
is controlled by bits 1:0 (XCLKOUTDIV) in the XCLK register. At reset, XCLKOUT =
SYSCLKOUT/4. The XCLKOUT signal can be turned off by setting XCLKOUTDIV
to 3. The mux control for GPIO18 must also be set to XCLKOUT for this signal to
propogate to the pin.
I
See GPIO19 and GPIO38. External oscillator input. Pin source for the clock is
controlled by the XCLKINSEL bit in the XCLK register, GPIO38 is the default
selection. This pin feeds a clock from an external 3.3-V oscillator. In this case, the X1
pin, if available, must be tied to GND and the on-chip crystal oscillator must be
disabled via bit 14 in the CLKCTL register. If a crystal/resonator is used, the XCLKIN
path must be disabled by bit 13 in the CLKCTL register.
NOTE: Designs that use the GPIO38/TCK/XCLKIN pin to supply an external clock for
normal device operation may need to incorporate some hooks to disable this path
during debug using the JTAG connector. This is to prevent contention with the TCK
signal, which is active during JTAG debug sessions. The zero-pin internal oscillators
may be used during this time to clock the device.
CLOCK
XCLKOUT
XCLKIN
(1)
8
See GPIO18
See GPIO19 and
GPIO38
I = Input, O = Output, Z = High Impedance, OD = Open Drain, ↑ = Pullup, ↓ = Pulldown
Introduction
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 2-2. TERMINAL FUNCTIONS (continued)
TERMINAL
PT
PIN #
DA
PIN #
I/O/Z
X1
45
–
I
On-chip crystal-oscillator input. To use this oscillator, a quartz crystal or a ceramic
resonator must be connected across X1 and X2. In this case, the XCLKIN path must
be disabled by bit 13 in the CLKCTL register. If this pin is not used, it must be tied to
GND. (I)
X2
46
–
O
On-chip crystal-oscillator output. A quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator must be
connected across X1 and X2. If X2 is not used, it must be left unconnected. (O)
NAME
DESCRIPTION
RESET
XRS
3
17
I/OD
Device Reset (in) and Watchdog Reset (out). Piccolo devices have a built-in
power-on-reset (POR) and brown-out-reset (BOR) circuitry. As such, no external
circuitry is needed to generate a reset pulse. During a power-on or brown-out
condition, this pin is driven low by the device. See Section 6.3, Electrical
Characteristics, for thresholds of the POR/BOR block. This pin is also driven low by
the MCU when a watchdog reset occurs. During watchdog reset, the XRS pin is driven
low for the watchdog reset duration of 512 OSCCLK cycles. If need be, an external
circuitry may also drive this pin to assert a device reset. In this case, it is
recommended that this pin be driven by an open-drain device. An R-C circuit must be
connected to this pin for noise immunity reasons. Regardless of the source, a device
reset causes the device to terminate execution. The program counter points to the
address contained at the location 0x3FFFC0. When reset is deactivated, execution
begins at the location designated by the program counter. The output buffer of this pin
is an open-drain with an internal pullup. (I/OD)
ADC, COMPARATOR, ANALOG I/O
ADCINA7
–
I
ADC Group A, Channel 7 input
4
18
I
I/O
ADC Group A, Channel 6 input
Digital AIO 6
ADCINA4
COMP2A
AIO4
5
19
I
I
I/O
ADC Group A, Channel 4 input
Comparator Input 2A (available in 48-pin device only)
Digital AIO 4
ADCINA3
7
–
I
ADC Group A, Channel 3 input
ADCINA2
COMP1A
AIO2
9
20
I
I
I/O
ADC Group A, Channel 2 input
Comparator Input 1A
Digital AIO 2
ADCINA1
8
–
I
ADC Group A, Channel 1 input
ADCINA0
VREFHI
10
21
I
I
ADC Group A, Channel 0 input
ADC External Reference – only used when in ADC external reference mode. See
Section 4.1.1, ADC.
ADCINB7
18
–
I
ADC Group B, Channel 7 input
ADC Group B, Channel 6 input
Digital AIO 14
ADC Group B, Channel 4 input
Comparator Input 2B (available in 48-pin device only)
Digital AIO12
ADCINA6
AIO6
6
ADCINB6
AIO14
17
26
I
I/O
ADCINB4
COMP2B
AIO12
16
25
I
I
I/O
ADCINB3
15
–
I
ADC Group B, Channel 3 input
ADCINB2
COMP1B
AIO10
14
24
I
I
I/O
ADC Group B, Channel 2 input
Comparator Input 1B
Digital AIO 10
ADCINB1
13
–
I
ADC Group B, Channel 1 input
Introduction
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
9
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-2. TERMINAL FUNCTIONS (continued)
TERMINAL
PT
PIN #
DA
PIN #
VDDA
11
22
VSSA
VREFLO
12
23
VDD
32
1
VDD
43
11
VDDIO
35
4
VSS
33
2
VSS
44
12
NAME
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
CPU AND I/O POWER
Analog Power Pin. Tie with a 2.2-µF capacitor (typical) close to the pin.
Analog Ground Pin
ADC Low Reference (always tied to ground)
I
CPU and Logic Digital Power Pins – no supply source needed when using internal
VREG. Tie with 1.2 µF (minimum) ceramic capacitor (10% tolerance) to ground when
using internal VREG. Higher value capacitors may be used, but could impact
supply-rail ramp-up time.
Digital I/O and Flash Power Pin – Single Supply source when VREG is enabled. Tie
with a 2.2-µF capacitor (typical) close to the pin.
Digital Ground Pins
VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL SIGNAL
VREGENZ
34
3
I
Internal VREG Enable/Disable. Pull low to enable the internal voltage regulator
(VREG), pull high to disable VREG.
GPIO AND PERIPHERAL SIGNALS
GPIO0
29
37
I/O/Z
(1)
General purpose input/output 0
EPWM1A
O
Enhanced PWM1 Output A and HRPWM channel
–
–
–
–
–
–
GPIO1
28
36
I/O/Z
EPWM1B
O
–
–
COMP1OUT
GPIO2
37
5
EPWM2A
General purpose input/output 1
Enhanced PWM1 Output B
O
Direct output of Comparator 1
I/O/Z
General purpose input/output 2
O
–
Enhanced PWM2 Output A and HRPWM channel
–
–
–
GPIO3
38
6
EPWM2B
I/O/Z
O
–
General purpose input/output 3
Enhanced PWM2 Output B
–
COMP2OUT
O
GPIO4
39
7
EPWM3A
I/O/Z
O
Direct output of Comparator 2 (available in 48-pin device only)
General purpose input/output 4
Enhanced PWM3 output A and HRPWM channel
–
–
–
–
GPIO5
40
8
EPWM3B
I/O/Z
O
–
General purpose input/output 5
Enhanced PWM3 output B
–
ECAP1
I/O
GPIO6
41
9
I/O/Z
Enhanced Capture input/output 1
General purpose input/output 6
EPWM4A
O
Enhanced PWM4 output A and HRPWM channel
EPWMSYNCI
I
External ePWM sync pulse input
EPWMSYNCO
O
External ePWM sync pulse output
(1)
10
The GPIO function (shown in bold italics) is the default at reset. The peripheral signals that are listed under them are alternate functions.
For JTAG pins that have the GPIO functionality multiplexed, the input path to the GPIO block is always valid. The output path from the
GPIO block and the path to the JTAG block from a pin is enabled/disabled based on the condition of the TRST signal. See the
TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide (literature number SPRUFN3) for details.
Introduction
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 2-2. TERMINAL FUNCTIONS (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
GPIO7
PT
PIN #
DA
PIN #
I/O/Z
42
10
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
General purpose input/output 7
EPWM4B
O
Enhanced PWM4 output B
SCIRXDA
I
SCI-A receive data
–
GPIO12
–
47
13
I/O/Z
General purpose input/output 12
TZ1
I
Trip Zone input 1
SCITXDA
O
SCI-A transmit data
–
GPIO16
–
27
35
SPISIMOA
I/O/Z
I/O
–
I
26
34
SPISOMIA
I/O/Z
I/O
–
Trip Zone input 2
General purpose input/output 17
SPI-A slave out, master in
–
TZ3
GPIO18
SPI slave in, master out
–
TZ2
GPIO17
General purpose input/output 16
I
24
32
I/O/Z
Trip zone input 3
General purpose input/output 18
SPICLKA
I/O
SPI-A clock input/output
SCITXDA
O
SCI-A transmit
XCLKOUT
GPIO19
25
33
O/Z
Output clock derived from SYSCLKOUT. XCLKOUT is either the same frequency,
one-half the frequency, or one-fourth the frequency of SYSCLKOUT. This is controlled
by bits 1:0 (XCLKOUTDIV) in the XCLK register. At reset, XCLKOUT =
SYSCLKOUT/4. The XCLKOUT signal can be turned off by setting XCLKOUTDIV
to 3. The mux control for GPIO18 must also be set to XCLKOUT for this signal to
propogate to the pin.
I/O/Z
General purpose input/output 19
External Oscillator Input. The path from this pin to the clock block is not gated by the
mux function of this pin. Care must be taken not to enable this path for clocking if it is
being used for the other periperhal functions
XCLKIN
SPISTEA
I/O
SCIRXDA
I
ECAP1
GPIO28
48
14
SCIRXDA
GPIO29
1
15
I/O/Z
O
SCLA
I/OD
TZ3
SDAA
General purpose input/output 28
I
SCITXDA
GPIO32
Enhanced Capture input/output 1
I/O/Z
I/OD
TZ2
I
31
–
SCI-A receive
I/O
I
SDAA
SPI-A slave transmit enable input/output
SCI receive data
I2C data open-drain bidirectional port
Trip zone input 2
General purpose input/output 29.
SCI transmit data
I2C clock open-drain bidirectional port
Trip zone input 3
I/O/Z
General purpose input/output 32
I/OD
I2C data open-drain bidirectional port
EPWMSYNCI
I
Enhanced PWM external sync pulse input
ADCSOCAO
O
ADC start-of-conversion A
Introduction
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
11
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 2-2. TERMINAL FUNCTIONS (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
GPIO33
PT
PIN #
DA
PIN #
I/O/Z
36
–
I/O/Z
General-Purpose Input/Output 33
I/OD
I2C clock open-drain bidirectional port
SCLA
DESCRIPTION
EPWMSYNCO
O
Enhanced PWM external synch pulse output
ADCSOCBO
O
ADC start-of-conversion B
GPIO34
19
27
COMP2OUT
I/O/Z
O
–
General-Purpose Input/Output 34
Direct output of Comparator 2. COMP2OUT signal is not available in the DA package.
–
–
–
GPIO35
20
28
TDI
I/O/Z
I
GPIO36
21
29
TMS
I/O/Z
I
GPIO37
22
30
TDO
GPIO38
23
31
General-Purpose Input/Output 35
JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the selected register
(instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK
General-Purpose Input/Output 36
JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control input is clocked
into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK.
I/O/Z
General-Purpose Input/Output 37
O/Z
JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected register
(instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK (8 mA drive)
I/O/Z
General-Purpose Input/Output 38
TCK
I
JTAG test clock with internal pullup
XCLKIN
I
External Oscillator Input. The path from this pin to the clock block is not gated by the
mux function of this pin. Care must be taken to not enable this path for clocking if it is
being used for the other functions.
12
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3 Functional Overview
3.1
Block Diagram
Memory Bus
M0
SARAM 1K x 16
(0-wait)
M1
SARAM 1K x 16
(0-wait)
OTP 1K x 16
Secure
SARAM
1K/3K/4K x 16
(0-wait)
Secure
Code
Security
Module
Boot-ROM
8K x 16
(0-wait)
FLASH
8K/16K/32K x 16
Secure
OTP/Flash
Wrapper
PSWD
Memory Bus
TRST
TCK
TDI
TMS
TDO
GPIO
32-bit periph eral bus
COMP1OUT
COMP2OUT
MUX
COMP1A
COMP1B
COMP2A
COMP2B
COMP
C28x
32-bit CPU
3 External Interrupts
PIE
CPU Timer 0
AIO
CPU Timer 1
MUX
CPU Timer 2
OSC1,
OSC2,
Ext,
PLL,
LPM,
WD
XCLKIN
X1
X2
LPM Wakeup
XRS
ADC
A7:0
Memory Bus
POR/
BOR
B7:0
32-bit Peripheral Bus
32-Bit Peripheral Bus
eCAP
From
COMP1OUT,
COMP2OUT
ECA Px
ESYNCI
EPWMxB
EPWMxA
HRPWM
TZx
SCLx
SDAx
VREG
ePWM
I2C
(4L FIFO)
SPISTEx
SPICLKx
SPISIMOx
SPISOMIx
SCITXDx
SCIRXDx
SPI
(4L FIFO)
ESYNCO
16-bit Peripheral Bus
SCI
(4L FIFO)
GPIO
Mux
GPIO MUX
A.
Not all peripheral pins are available at the same time due to multiplexing.
Figure 3-1. Functional Block Diagram
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
13
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.2
www.ti.com
Memory Maps
In Figure 3-2, Figure 3-3, Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5, and Figure 3-6, the following apply:
• Memory blocks are not to scale.
• Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1 and Peripheral Frame 2 memory maps are restricted to data
memory only. A user program cannot access these memory maps in program space.
• Protected means the order of Write-followed-by-Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline
order.
• Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.
• Locations 0x3D7C80 – 0x3D7CC0 contain the internal oscillator and ADC calibration routines. These
locations are not programmable by the user.
14
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Prog Space
Data Space
0x00 0000
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
0x00 0040
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0400
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0800
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 0D00
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
0x00 0E00
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 2000
Reserved
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 1
(4K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
0x00 7000
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
0x00 8000
L0 SARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x00 9000
Reserved
0x3D 7800
User OTP (1K x 16, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3D 7C00
Reserved
0x3D 7C80
Calibration Data
0x3D 7CC0
Get_mode function
0x3D 7CE0
Reserved
0x3D 7E80
Calibration Data
0x3D 7EB0
Reserved
0x3D 7FFF
PARTID
0x3D 8000
Reserved
0x3F 0000
FLASH
(32K x 16, 4 Sectors, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3F 7FF8
128-Bit Password
0x3F 8000
L0 SARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x3F 9000
A.
Reserved
0x3F E000
Boot ROM (8K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x3F FFC0
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Memory locations 0x3D 7E80–0x3D 7EAF are reserved in TMX/TMP silicon.
Figure 3-2. 28023/28027 Memory Map
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
15
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Prog Space
Data Space
0x00 0000
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
0x00 0040
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
0x00 0E00
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 2000
Reserved
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 1
(4K x 16, Protected)
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 SARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x00 9000
Reserved
0x3D 7800
User OTP (1K x 16, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3D 7C00
Reserved
0x3D 7C80
0x3D 7CC0
0x3D 7CE0
0x3D 7E80
0x3D 7EB0
0x3D 7FFF
0x3D 8000
Calibration Data
Get_mode function
Reserved
Calibration Data
Reserved
PARTID
Reserved
0x3F 4000
FLASH
(16K x 16, 4 Sectors, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3F 7FF8
0x3F 8000
0x3F 9000
A.
128-Bit Password
L0 SARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
Reserved
0x3F E000
Boot ROM (8K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x3F FFC0
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Memory locations 0x3D 7E80–0x3D 7EAF are reserved in TMX/TMP silicon.
Figure 3-3. 28022/28026 Memory Map
16
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Prog Space
Data Space
0x00 0000
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
0x00 0040
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
0x00 0E00
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 2000
Reserved
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 1
(4K x 16, Protected)
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 SARAM (3K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x00 8C00
Reserved
0x3D 7800
User OTP (1K x 16, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3D 7C00
0x3D 7C80
0x3D 7CC0
0x3D 7CE0
0x3D 7E80
0x3D 7EB0
0x3D 7FFF
0x3D 8000
Reserved
Calibration Data
Get_mode function
Reserved
Calibration Data
Reserved
PARTID
Reserved
0x3F 0000
FLASH
(32K x 16, 4 Sectors, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3F 7FF8
0x3F 8000
A.
128-Bit Password
L0 SARAM (3K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x3F 8C00
Reserved
0x3F E000
Boot ROM (8K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x3F FFC0
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Memory locations 0x3D 7E80–0x3D 7EAF are reserved in TMX/TMP silicon.
Figure 3-4. 28021 Memory Map
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
17
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Prog Space
Data Space
0x00 0000
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
0x00 0040
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
0x00 0E00
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 2000
Reserved
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 1
(4K x 16, Protected)
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 SARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x00 8400
Reserved
0x3D 7800
User OTP (1K x 16, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3D 7C00
0x3D 7C80
0x3D 7CC0
0x3D 7CE0
0x3D 7E80
0x3D 7EB0
0x3D 7FFF
0x3D 8000
Reserved
Calibration Data
Get_mode function
Reserved
Calibration Data
Reserved
PARTID
Reserved
0x3F 4000
FLASH
(16K x 16, 4 Sectors, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3F 7FF8
0x3F 8000
0x3F 8400
A.
128-Bit Password
L0 SARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
Reserved
0x3F E000
Boot ROM (8K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x3F FFC0
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Memory locations 0x3D 7E80–0x3D 7EAF are reserved in TMX/TMP silicon.
Figure 3-5. 28020 Memory Map
18
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Prog Space
Data Space
0x00 0000
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
0x00 0040
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0400
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0800
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 0D00
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
0x00 0E00
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 0
0x00 2000
Reserved
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 1
(4K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
0x00 7000
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
0x00 8000
L0 SARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x00 8400
Reserved
0x3D 7800
User OTP (1K x 16, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3D 7C00
Reserved
0x3D 7C80
Calibration Data
0x3D 7CC0
Get_mode function
0x3D 7CE0
Reserved
0x3D 7E80
Calibration Data
0x3D 7EB0
Reserved
0x3D 7FFF
PARTID
0x3D 8000
Reserved
0x3F 6000
FLASH
(8K x 16, 2 Sectors, Secure Zone + ECSL)
0x3F 7FF8
128-Bit Password
0x3F 8000
L0 SARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Secure Zone + ECSL, Dual Mapped)
0x3F 8400
Reserved
0x3F E000
Boot ROM (8K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x3F FFC0
A.
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Memory locations 0x3D 7E80–0x3D 7EAF are reserved in TMX/TMP silicon.
Figure 3-6. 280200 Memory Map
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
19
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-1. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F28021/28023/28027
ADDRESS RANGE
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 1FFF
Sector D (8K x 16)
0x3F 2000 – 0x3F 3FFF
Sector C (8K x 16)
0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 5FFF
Sector B (8K x 16)
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 7F7F
Sector A (8K x 16)
0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5
Program to 0x0000 when using the
Code Security Module
0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7
Boot-to-Flash Entry Point
(program branch instruction here)
0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF
Security Password (128-Bit)
(Do not program to all zeros)
Table 3-2. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F28020/28022/28026
ADDRESS RANGE
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 4FFF
Sector D (4K x 16)
0x3F 5000 – 0x3F 5FFF
Sector C (4K x 16)
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF
Sector B (4K x 16)
0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7F7F
Sector A (4K x 16)
0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5
Program to 0x0000 when using the
Code Security Module
0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7
Boot-to-Flash Entry Point
(program branch instruction here)
0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF
Security Password (128-Bit)
(Do not program to all zeros)
Table 3-3. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F280200
ADDRESS RANGE
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF
Sector B (4K x 16)
0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7F7F
Sector A (4K x 16)
0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FF5
Program to 0x0000 when using the
Code Security Module
0x3F 7FF6 – 0x3F 7FF7
Boot-to-Flash Entry Point
(program branch instruction here)
0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF
Security Password (128-Bit)
(Do not program to all zeros)
NOTE
•
When the code-security passwords are programmed, all addresses between 0x3F 7F80
and 0x3F 7FF5 cannot be used as program code or data. These locations must be
programmed to 0x0000.
• If the code security feature is not used, addresses 0x3F 7F80 through 0x3F 7FEF may
be used for code or data. Addresses 0x3F 7FF0 – 0x3F 7FF5 are reserved for data and
should not contain program code.
Table 3-4 shows how to handle these memory locations.
20
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 3-4. Impact of Using the Code Security Module
FLASH
ADDRESS
CODE SECURITY ENABLED
0x3F 7F80 – 0x3F 7FEF
Fill with 0x0000
0x3F 7FF0 – 0x3F 7FF5
CODE SECURITY DISABLED
Application code and data
Reserved for data only
Peripheral Frame 1 and Peripheral Frame 2 are grouped together to enable these blocks to be write/read
peripheral block protected. The protected mode makes sure that all accesses to these blocks happen as
written. Because of the pipeline, a write immediately followed by a read to different memory locations, will
appear in reverse order on the memory bus of the CPU. This can cause problems in certain peripheral
applications where the user expected the write to occur first (as written). The CPU supports a block
protection mode where a region of memory can be protected so that operations occur as written (the
penalty is extra cycles are added to align the operations). This mode is programmable and by default, it
protects the selected zones.
The wait-states for the various spaces in the memory map area are listed in Table 3-5 .
Table 3-5. Wait-states
AREA
WAIT-STATES (CPU)
M0 and M1 SARAMs
0-wait
Peripheral Frame 0
0-wait
Peripheral Frame 1
0-wait (writes)
Cycles can be extended by peripheral generated ready.
2-wait (reads)
Back-to-back write operations to Peripheral Frame 1 registers will incur
a 1-cycle stall (1-cycle delay).
0-wait (writes)
Fixed. Cycles cannot be extended by the peripheral.
Peripheral Frame 2
COMMENTS
Fixed
2-wait (reads)
L0 SARAM
0-wait data and program
OTP
Programmable
Programmed via the Flash registers.
1-wait minimum
1-wait is minimum number of wait states allowed.
Programmable
Programmed via the Flash registers.
FLASH
Assumes no CPU conflicts
0-wait Paged min
1-wait Random min
Random ≥ Paged
FLASH Password
16-wait fixed
Boot-ROM
0-wait
Wait states of password locations are fixed.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
21
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.3
www.ti.com
Brief Descriptions
3.3.1
CPU
The 2802x (C28x) family is a member of the TMS320C2000™ microcontroller (MCU) platform. The
C28x-based controllers have the same 32-bit fixed-point architecture as existing C28x MCUs. It is a very
efficient C/C++ engine, enabling users to develop not only their system control software in a high-level
language, but also enabling development of math algorithms using C/C++. The device is as efficient at
MCU math tasks as it is at system control tasks that typically are handled by microcontroller devices. This
efficiency removes the need for a second processor in many systems. The 32 x 32-bit MAC 64-bit
processing capabilities enable the controller to handle higher numerical resolution problems efficiently.
Add to this the fast interrupt response with automatic context save of critical registers, resulting in a device
that is capable of servicing many asynchronous events with minimal latency. The device has an
8-level-deep protected pipeline with pipelined memory accesses. This pipelining enables it to execute at
high speeds without resorting to expensive high-speed memories. Special branch-look-ahead hardware
minimizes the latency for conditional discontinuities. Special store conditional operations further improve
performance.
3.3.2
Memory Bus (Harvard Bus Architecture)
As with many MCU-type devices, multiple busses are used to move data between the memories and
peripherals and the CPU. The memory bus architecture contains a program read bus, data read bus, and
data write bus. The program read bus consists of 22 address lines and 32 data lines. The data read and
write busses consist of 32 address lines and 32 data lines each. The 32-bit-wide data busses enable
single cycle 32-bit operations. The multiple bus architecture, commonly termed Harvard Bus, enables the
C28x to fetch an instruction, read a data value and write a data value in a single cycle. All peripherals and
memories attached to the memory bus prioritize memory accesses. Generally, the priority of memory bus
accesses can be summarized as follows:
Highest:
Data Writes
(Simultaneous data and program writes cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Program Writes
(Simultaneous data and program writes cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Data Reads
Lowest:
3.3.3
Program Reads
(Simultaneous program reads and fetches cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Fetches
(Simultaneous program reads and fetches cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Peripheral Bus
To enable migration of peripherals between various Texas Instruments (TI) MCU family of devices, the
devices adopt a peripheral bus standard for peripheral interconnect. The peripheral bus bridge multiplexes
the various busses that make up the processor Memory Bus into a single bus consisting of 16 address
lines and 16 or 32 data lines and associated control signals. Three versions of the peripheral bus are
supported. One version supports only 16-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 2). Another version
supports both 16- and 32-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 1).
3.3.4
Real-Time JTAG and Analysis
The devices implement the standard IEEE 1149.1 JTAG (1) interface for in-circuit based debug.
Additionally, the devices support real-time mode of operation allowing modification of the contents of
memory, peripheral, and register locations while the processor is running and executing code and
servicing interrupts. The user can also single step through non-time-critical code while enabling
time-critical interrupts to be serviced without interference. The device implements the real-time mode in
(1)
22
IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
hardware within the CPU. This is a feature unique to the 28x family of devices, requiring no software
monitor. Additionally, special analysis hardware is provided that allows setting of hardware breakpoint or
data/address watch-points and generating various user-selectable break events when a match occurs.
These devices do not support boundary scan; however, IDCODE and BYPASS features are available if
the following considerations are taken into account. The IDCODE does not come by default. The user
needs to go through a sequence of SHIFT IR and SHIFT DR state of JTAG to get the IDCODE. For
BYPASS instruction, the first shifted DR value would be 1.
3.3.5
Flash
The F280200 device contains 8K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into two 4K x 16 sectors.
The F28021/23/27 devices contain 32K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into four 8K x 16
sectors. The F28020/22/26 devices contain 16K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into four
4K x 16 sectors. All devices also contain a single 1K x 16 of OTP memory at address range 0x3D 7800 –
0x3D 7BFF. The user can individually erase, program, and validate a flash sector while leaving other
sectors untouched. However, it is not possible to use one sector of the flash or the OTP to execute flash
algorithms that erase/program other sectors. Special memory pipelining is provided to enable the flash
module to achieve higher performance. The flash/OTP is mapped to both program and data space;
therefore, it can be used to execute code or store data information. Addresses 0x3F 7FF0 – 0x3F 7FF5
are reserved for data variables and should not contain program code.
NOTE
The Flash and OTP wait-states can be configured by the application. This allows applications
running at slower frequencies to configure the flash to use fewer wait-states.
Flash effective performance can be improved by enabling the flash pipeline mode in the
Flash options register. With this mode enabled, effective performance of linear code
execution will be much faster than the raw performance indicated by the wait-state
configuration alone. The exact performance gain when using the Flash pipeline mode is
application-dependent.
For more information on the Flash options, Flash wait-state, and OTP wait-state registers,
see the TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference
Guide (literature number SPRUFN3).
3.3.6
M0, M1 SARAMs
All devices contain these two blocks of single access memory, each 1K x 16 in size. The stack pointer
points to the beginning of block M1 on reset. The M0 and M1 blocks, like all other memory blocks on C28x
devices, are mapped to both program and data space. Hence, the user can use M0 and M1 to execute
code or for data variables. The partitioning is performed within the linker. The C28x device presents a
unified memory map to the programmer. This makes for easier programming in high-level languages.
3.3.7
L0 SARAM
The device contains up to 4K x 16 of single-access RAM. Refer to the device-specific memory map figures
in Section 3.2 to ascertain the exact size for a given device. This block is mapped to both program and
data space.
3.3.8
Boot ROM
The Boot ROM is factory-programmed with boot-loading software. Boot-mode signals are provided to tell
the bootloader software what boot mode to use on power up. The user can select to boot normally or to
download new software from an external connection or to select boot software that is programmed in the
internal Flash/ROM. The Boot ROM also contains standard tables, such as SIN/COS waveforms, for use
in math-related algorithms.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
23
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-6. Boot Mode Selection
MODE
GPIO37/TDO
GPIO34/COMP2OUT
TRST
3
1
1
0
GetMode
2
1
0
0
Wait (see Section 3.3.9 for description)
1
0
1
0
SCI
0
0
0
0
Parallel IO
EMU
x
x
1
Emulation Boot
3.3.8.1
MODE
Emulation Boot
When the emulator is connected, the GPIO37/TDO pin cannot be used for boot mode selection. In this
case, the boot ROM detects that an emulator is connected and uses the contents of two reserved SARAM
locations in the PIE vector table to determine the boot mode. If the content of either location is invalid,
then the Wait boot option is used. All boot mode options can be accessed in emulation boot.
3.3.8.2
GetMode
The default behavior of the GetMode option is to boot to flash. This behavior can be changed to another
boot option by programming two locations in the OTP. If the content of either OTP location is invalid, then
boot to flash is used. One of the following loaders can be specified: SCI, SPI, I2C, or OTP.
3.3.8.3
Peripheral Pins Used by the Bootloader
Table 3-7 shows which GPIO pins are used by each peripheral bootloader. Refer to the GPIO mux table
to see if these conflict with any of the peripherals you would like to use in your application.
Table 3-7. Peripheral Bootload Pins
BOOTLOADER
SCIRXDA (GPIO28)
SCITXDA (GPIO29)
Parallel Boot
Data (GPIO[7:0])
28x Control (GPIO16)
Host Control (GPIO12)
SPI
SPISIMOA (GPIO16)
SPISOMIA (GPIO17)
SPICLKA (GPIO18)
SPISTEA (GPIO19)
I2C
SDAA (GPIO32) (1)
SCLA (GPIO33) (1)
(1)
3.3.9
PERIPHERAL LOADER PINS
SCI
GPIO pins 32 and 33 may not be available on your device package. On these devices, this bootload
option is unavailable.
Security
The devices support high levels of security to protect the user firmware from being reverse engineered.
The security features a 128-bit password (hardcoded for 16 wait-states), which the user programs into the
flash. One code security module (CSM) is used to protect the flash/OTP and the L0/L1 SARAM blocks.
The security feature prevents unauthorized users from examining the memory contents via the JTAG port,
executing code from external memory or trying to boot-load some undesirable software that would export
the secure memory contents. To enable access to the secure blocks, the user must write the correct
128-bit KEY value that matches the value stored in the password locations within the Flash.
In addition to the CSM, the emulation code security logic (ECSL) has been implemented to prevent
unauthorized users from stepping through secure code. Any code or data access to flash, user OTP, or L0
memory while the emulator is connected will trip the ECSL and break the emulation connection. To allow
24
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
emulation of secure code, while maintaining the CSM protection against secure memory reads, the user
must write the correct value into the lower 64 bits of the KEY register, which matches the value stored in
the lower 64 bits of the password locations within the flash. Note that dummy reads of all 128 bits of the
password in the flash must still be performed. If the lower 64 bits of the password locations are all ones
(unprogrammed), then the KEY value does not need to match.
When initially debugging a device with the password locations in flash programmed (i.e., secured), the
CPU will start running and may execute an instruction that performs an access to a protected ECSL area.
If this happens, the ECSL will trip and cause the emulator connection to be cut.
The solution is to use the Wait boot option. This will sit in a loop around a software breakpoint to allow an
emulator to be connected without tripping security. The user can then exit this mode once the emulator is
connected by using one of the emulation boot options as described in the TMS320x2802x Piccolo Boot
ROM Reference Guide (literature number SPRUFN6). Piccolo devices do not support a hardware
wait-in-reset mode.
NOTE
•
When the code-security passwords are programmed, all addresses between 0x3F7F80
and 0x3F7FF5 cannot be used as program code or data. These locations must be
programmed to 0x0000.
• If the code security feature is not used, addresses 0x3F7F80 through 0x3F7FEF may be
used for code or data. Addresses 0x3F7FF0 – 0x3F7FF5 are reserved for data and
should not contain program code.
The 128-bit password (at 0x3F 7FF8 – 0x3F 7FFF) must not be programmed to zeros. Doing
so would permanently lock the device.
Disclaimer
Code Security Module Disclaimer
THE CODE SECURITY MODULE (CSM) INCLUDED ON THIS DEVICE WAS DESIGNED
TO PASSWORD PROTECT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED MEMORY
(EITHER ROM OR FLASH) AND IS WARRANTED BY TEXAS INSTRUMENTS (TI), IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ITS STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS, TO CONFORM TO
TI'S PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE WARRANTY PERIOD APPLICABLE FOR
THIS DEVICE.
TI DOES NOT, HOWEVER, WARRANT OR REPRESENT THAT THE CSM CANNOT BE
COMPROMISED OR BREACHED OR THAT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED
MEMORY CANNOT BE ACCESSED THROUGH OTHER MEANS. MOREOVER, EXCEPT
AS SET FORTH ABOVE, TI MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS
CONCERNING THE CSM OR OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL TI BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE CSM OR THIS DEVICE, WHETHER OR NOT TI HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. EXCLUDED DAMAGES INCLUDE,
BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OR
INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR OTHER ECONOMIC LOSS.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
25
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
3.3.10 Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Block
The PIE block serves to multiplex numerous interrupt sources into a smaller set of interrupt inputs. The
PIE block can support up to 96 peripheral interrupts. On the F2802x , 33 of the possible 96 interrupts are
used by peripherals. The 96 interrupts are grouped into blocks of 8 and each group is fed into 1 of
12 CPU interrupt lines (INT1 to INT12). Each of the 96 interrupts is supported by its own vector stored in a
dedicated RAM block that can be overwritten by the user. The vector is automatically fetched by the CPU
on servicing the interrupt. It takes 8 CPU clock cycles to fetch the vector and save critical CPU registers.
Hence the CPU can quickly respond to interrupt events. Prioritization of interrupts is controlled in
hardware and software. Each individual interrupt can be enabled/disabled within the PIE block.
3.3.11 External Interrupts (XINT1–XINT3)
The devices support three masked external interrupts (XINT1–XINT3). Each of the interrupts can be
selected for negative, positive, or both negative and positive edge triggering and can also be
enabled/disabled. These interrupts also contain a 16-bit free running up counter, which is reset to zero
when a valid interrupt edge is detected. This counter can be used to accurately time stamp the interrupt.
There are no dedicated pins for the external interrupts. XINT1, XINT2, and XINT3 interrupts can accept
inputs from GPIO0–GPIO31 pins.
3.3.12 Internal Zero Pin Oscillators, Oscillator, and PLL
The device can be clocked by either of the two internal zero-pin oscillators, an external oscillator, or by a
crystal attached to the on-chip oscillator circuit (48-pin devices only). A PLL is provided supporting up to
12 input-clock-scaling ratios. The PLL ratios can be changed on-the-fly in software, enabling the user to
scale back on operating frequency if lower power operation is desired. Refer to Section 6, Electrical
Specifications, for timing details. The PLL block can be set in bypass mode.
3.3.13 Watchdog
Each device contains two watchdogs: CPU-Watchdog that monitors the core and NMI-Watchdog that is a
missing clock-detect circuit. The user software must regularly reset the CPU-watchdog counter within a
certain time frame; otherwise, the CPU-watchdog generates a reset to the processor. The CPU-watchdog
can be disabled if necessary. The NMI-Watchdog engages only in case of a clock failure and can either
generate an interrupt or a device reset.
3.3.14 Peripheral Clocking
The clocks to each individual peripheral can be enabled/disabled to reduce power consumption when a
peripheral is not in use. Additionally, the system clock to the serial ports (except I2C) can be scaled
relative to the CPU clock.
26
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.3.15 Low-power Modes
The devices are full static CMOS devices. Three low-power modes are provided:
IDLE:
Place CPU in low-power mode. Peripheral clocks may be turned off selectively and
only those peripherals that need to function during IDLE are left operating. An
enabled interrupt from an active peripheral or the watchdog timer will wake the
processor from IDLE mode.
STANDBY: Turns off clock to CPU and peripherals. This mode leaves the oscillator and PLL
functional. An external interrupt event will wake the processor and the peripherals.
Execution begins on the next valid cycle after detection of the interrupt event
HALT:
This mode basically shuts down the device and places it in the lowest possible power
consumption mode. If the internal zero-pin oscillators are used as the clock source,
the HALT mode turns them off, by default. To keep these oscillators from shutting
down, the INTOSCnHALTI bits in CLKCTL register may be used. The zero-pin
oscillators may thus be used to clock the CPU-watchdog in this mode. If the on-chip
crystal oscillator is used as the clock source, it is shut down in this mode. A reset or
an external signal (through a GPIO pin) or the CPU-watchdog can wake the device
from this mode.
The CPU clock (OSCCLK) and WDCLK should be from the same clock source before attempting to put
the device into HALT or STANDBY.
3.3.16 Peripheral Frames 0, 1, 2 (PFn)
The device segregates peripherals into three sections. The mapping of peripherals is as follows:
PF0:
PF1:
PF2:
PIE:
PIE Interrupt Enable and Control Registers Plus PIE Vector Table
Flash:
Flash Waitstate Registers
Timers:
CPU-Timers 0, 1, 2 Registers
CSM:
Code Security Module KEY Registers
ADC:
ADC Result Registers
GPIO:
GPIO MUX Configuration and Control Registers
ePWM:
Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Module and Registers
eCAP:
Enhanced Capture Module and Registers
Comparators:
Comparator Modules
SYS:
System Control Registers
SCI:
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Control and RX/TX Registers
SPI:
Serial Port Interface (SPI) Control and RX/TX Registers
ADC:
ADC Status, Control, and Configuration Registers
I2C:
Inter-Integrated Circuit Module and Registers
XINT:
External Interrupt Registers
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
27
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
3.3.17 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Multiplexer
Most of the peripheral signals are multiplexed with general-purpose input/output (GPIO) signals. This
enables the user to use a pin as GPIO if the peripheral signal or function is not used. On reset, GPIO pins
are configured as inputs. The user can individually program each pin for GPIO mode or peripheral signal
mode. For specific inputs, the user can also select the number of input qualification cycles. This is to filter
unwanted noise glitches. The GPIO signals can also be used to bring the device out of specific low-power
modes.
3.3.18 32-Bit CPU-Timers (0, 1, 2)
CPU-Timers 0, 1, and 2 are identical 32-bit timers with presettable periods and with 16-bit clock
prescaling. The timers have a 32-bit count-down register, which generates an interrupt when the counter
reaches zero. The counter is decremented at the CPU clock speed divided by the prescale value setting.
When the counter reaches zero, it is automatically reloaded with a 32-bit period value.
CPU-Timer 0 is for general use and is connected to the PIE block. CPU-Timer 1 is also for general use
and can be connected to INT13 of the CPU. CPU-Timer 2 is reserved for DSP/BIOS. It is connected to
INT14 of the CPU. If DSP/BIOS is not being used, CPU-Timer 2 is available for general use.
CPU-Timer 2 can be clocked by any one of the following:
• SYSCLKOUT (default)
• Internal zero-pin oscillator 1 (INTOSC1)
• Internal zero-pin oscillator 2 (INTSOC2)
• External clock source
3.3.19 Control Peripherals
The devices support the following peripherals that are used for embedded control and communication:
28
ePWM:
The enhanced PWM peripheral supports independent/complementary PWM
generation, adjustable dead-band generation for leading/trailing edges,
latched/cycle-by-cycle trip mechanism. Some of the PWM pins support the
HRPWM high resolution duty and period features. The type 1 module found on
2802x devices also supports increased dead-band resolution, enhanced SOC and
interrupt generation, and advanced triggering including trip functions based on
comparator outputs.
eCAP:
The enhanced capture peripheral uses a 32-bit time base and registers up to four
programmable events in continuous/one-shot capture modes.
This peripheral can also be configured to generate an auxiliary PWM signal.
ADC:
The ADC block is a 12-bit converter. It has up to 13 single-ended channels pinned
out, depending on the device. It contains two sample-and-hold units for
simultaneous sampling.
Comparator:
Each comparator block consists of one analog comparator along with an internal
10-bit reference for supplying one input of the comparator.
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.3.20 Serial Port Peripherals
The devices support the following serial communication peripherals:
SPI:
The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream
of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device
at a programmable bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for communications
between the MCU and external peripherals or another processor. Typical
applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices such as
shift registers, display drivers, and ADCs. Multi-device communications are
supported by the master/slave operation of the SPI. The SPI contains a 4-level
receive and transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
SCI:
The serial communications interface is a two-wire asynchronous serial port,
commonly known as UART. The SCI contains a 4-level receive and transmit FIFO
for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
I2C:
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between a MCU
and other devices compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus)
specification version 2.1 and connected by way of an I2C-bus. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive up to 8-bit data
to/from the MCU through the I2C module. The I2C contains a 4-level receive and
transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
29
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.4
www.ti.com
Register Map
The devices contain three peripheral register spaces. The spaces are categorized as follows:
Peripheral Frame 0: These are peripherals that are mapped directly to the CPU memory bus.
See Table 3-8.
Peripheral Frame 1: These are peripherals that are mapped to the 32-bit peripheral bus. See
Table 3-9.
Peripheral Frame 2: These are peripherals that are mapped to the 16-bit peripheral bus. See
Table 3-10.
Table 3-8. Peripheral Frame 0 Registers (1)
ADDRESS RANGE
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED (2)
Device Emulation Registers
0x00 0880 – 0x00 0984
261
Yes
System Power Control Registers
0x00 0985 – 0x00 0987
3
Yes
FLASH Registers (3)
0x00 0A80 – 0x00 0ADF
96
Yes
Code Security Module Registers
0x00 0AE0 – 0x00 0AEF
16
Yes
ADC registers
(0 wait read only)
0x00 0B00 – 0x00 0B0F
16
No
CPU–TIMER0/1/2 Registers
0x00 0C00 – 0x00 0C3F
64
No
PIE Registers
0x00 0CE0 – 0x00 0CFF
32
No
PIE Vector Table
0x00 0D00 – 0x00 0DFF
256
No
NAME
(1)
(2)
(3)
Registers in Frame 0 support 16-bit and 32-bit accesses.
If registers are EALLOW protected, then writes cannot be performed until the EALLOW instruction is executed. The EDIS instruction
disables writes to prevent stray code or pointers from corrupting register contents.
The Flash Registers are also protected by the Code Security Module (CSM).
Table 3-9. Peripheral Frame 1 Registers
NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
SIZE (×16)
Comparator 1 registers
0x00 6400 – 0x00 641F
32
(1)
Comparator 2 registers
0x00 6420 – 0x00 643F
32
(1)
ePWM1 + HRPWM1 registers
0x00 6800 – 0x00 683F
64
(1)
ePWM2 + HRPWM2 registers
0x00 6840 – 0x00 687F
64
(1)
ePWM3 + HRPWM3 registers
0x00 6880 – 0x00 68BF
64
(1)
ePWM4 + HRPWM4 registers
0x00 68C0 – 0x00 68FF
64
(1)
eCAP1 registers
0x00 6A00 – 0x00 6A1F
32
No
GPIO registers
0x00 6F80 – 0x00 6FFF
128
(1)
EALLOW PROTECTED
(1)
Some registers are EALLOW protected. See the module reference guide for more information.
Table 3-10. Peripheral Frame 2 Registers
ADDRESS RANGE
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
System Control Registers
NAME
0x00 7010 – 0x00 702F
32
Yes
SPI-A Registers
0x00 7040 – 0x00 704F
16
No
SCI-A Registers
0x00 7050 – 0x00 705F
16
No
NMI Watchdog Interrupt Registers
0x00 7060 – 0x00 706F
16
Yes
External Interrupt Registers
0x00 7070 – 0x00 707F
16
Yes
ADC Registers
0x00 7100 – 0x00 717F
128
(1)
I2C-A Registers
0x00 7900 – 0x00 793F
64
(1)
(1)
30
Some registers are EALLOW protected. See the module reference guide for more information.
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
3.5
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Device Emulation Registers
These registers are used to control the protection mode of the C28x CPU and to monitor some critical
device signals. The registers are defined in Table 3-11 .
Table 3-11. Device Emulation Registers
NAME
DEVICECNF
PARTID
CLASSID
REVID
ADDRESS
RANGE
SIZE (x16)
0x0880
0x0881
2
Device Configuration Register
0x3D 7FFF
1
Part ID Register
0x0882
0x0883
1
1
EALLOW
PROTECTED
DESCRIPTION
Class ID Register
Revision ID
Register
Yes
TMS320F280200PT
0x00C1
TMS320F280200DA
0x00C0
TMS320F28027PT
0x00CF
TMS320F28027DA
0x00CE
TMS320F28026PT
0x00C7
TMS320F28026DA
0x00C6
TMS320F28023PT
0x00CD
TMS320F28023DA
0x00CC
TMS320F28022PT
0x00C5
TMS320F28022DA
0x00C4
TMS320F28021PT
0x00CB
TMS320F28021DA
0x00CA
TMS320F28020PT
0x00C3
TMS320F28020DA
0x00C2
TMS320F280200PT/DA
0x00C7
TMS320F28027PT/DA
0x00CF
TMS320F28026PT/DA
0x00C7
TMS320F28023PT/DA
0x00CF
TMS320F28022PT/DA
0x00C7
TMS320F28021PT/DA
0x00CF
TMS320F28020PT/DA
0x00C7
0x0000 - Silicon Rev. 0 - TMS
No
No
No
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
31
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.6
www.ti.com
Interrupts
Figure 3-7 shows how the various interrupt sources are multiplexed.
Peripherals
(SPI, SCI, ePWM, I2C,
HRPWM, eCAP, ADC)
WDINT
WAKEINT
LPMINT
Watchdog
Low-Power Modes
SYSCLKOUT
XINT1
Interrupt Control
MUX
XINT1
Sync
C28
Core
GPIOXINT1SEL(4:0)
ADC
XINT2
XINT2SOC
XINT2
Interrupt Control
MUX
PIE
INT1
to
INT12
Up to 96 Interrupts
XINT1CR(15:0)
XINT2CTR(15:0)
XINT2CR(15:0)
XINT3CTR(15:0)
GPIOXINT2SEL(4:0)
XINT3
Interrupt Control
MUX
GPIO0.int
XINT3
XINT3CR(15:0)
GPIO
MUX
GPIO31.int
XINT3CTR(15:0)
GPIOXINT3SEL(4:0)
TINT0
INT13
TINT1
INT14
TINT2
NMI
CPU TIMER 0
CPU TIMER 1
CPU TIMER 2
NMI interrupt with watchdog function
(See the NMI Watchdog section.)
CPUTMR2CLK
CLOCKFAIL
NMIRS
System Control
(See the System
Control section.)
Figure 3-7. External and PIE Interrupt Sources
32
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Eight PIE block interrupts are grouped into one CPU interrupt. In total, 12 CPU interrupt groups, with
8 interrupts per group equals 96 possible interrupts. Table 3-12 shows the interrupts used by 2802x
devices.
The TRAP #VectorNumber instruction transfers program control to the interrupt service routine
corresponding to the vector specified. TRAP #0 attempts to transfer program control to the address
pointed to by the reset vector. The PIE vector table does not, however, include a reset vector. Therefore,
TRAP #0 should not be used when the PIE is enabled. Doing so will result in undefined behavior.
When the PIE is enabled, TRAP #1 through TRAP #12 will transfer program control to the interrupt service
routine corresponding to the first vector within the PIE group. For example: TRAP #1 fetches the vector
from INT1.1, TRAP #2 fetches the vector from INT2.1, and so forth.
IFR[12:1]
IER[12:1]
INTM
INT1
INT2
1
CPU
MUX
0
INT11
INT12
(Flag)
INTx
INTx.1
INTx.2
INTx.3
INTx.4
INTx.5
INTx.6
INTx.7
INTx.8
MUX
PIEACKx
(Enable/Flag)
Global
Enable
(Enable)
(Enable)
(Flag)
PIEIERx[8:1]
PIEIFRx[8:1]
From
Peripherals
or
External
Interrupts
Figure 3-8. Multiplexing of Interrupts Using the PIE Block
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
33
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 3-12. PIE MUXed Peripheral Interrupt Vector Table (1)
INT1.y
INT2.y
INT3.y
INT4.y
INT5.y
INT6.y
INT7.y
INT8.y
INT9.y
INT10.y
INT11.y
INT12.y
(1)
34
INTx.8
INTx.7
INTx.6
INTx.5
INTx.4
INTx.3
INTx.2
INTx.1
WAKEINT
TINT0
ADCINT9
XINT2
XINT1
Reserved
ADCINT2
ADCINT1
(LPM/WD)
(TIMER 0)
(ADC)
Ext. int. 2
Ext. int. 1
–
(ADC)
(ADC)
0xD4E
0xD4C
0xD4A
0xD48
0xD46
0xD44
0xD42
0xD40
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
EPWM4_TZINT
EPWM3_TZINT
EPWM2_TZINT
EPWM1_TZINT
–
–
–
–
(ePWM4)
(ePWM3)
(ePWM2)
(ePWM1)
0xD5E
0xD5C
0xD5A
0xD58
0xD56
0xD54
0xD52
0xD50
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
EPWM4_INT
EPWM3_INT
EPWM2_INT
EPWM1_INT
(ePWM1)
–
–
–
–
(ePWM4)
(ePWM3)
(ePWM2)
0xD6E
0xD6C
0xD6A
0xD68
0xD66
0xD64
0xD62
0xD60
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ECAP1_INT
(eCAP1)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0xD7E
0xD7C
0xD7A
0xD78
0xD76
0xD74
0xD72
0xD70
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0xD8E
0xD8C
0xD8A
0xD88
0xD86
0xD84
0xD82
0xD80
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SPITXINTA
SPIRXINTA
–
–
–
–
–
–
(SPI-A)
(SPI-A)
0xD9E
0xD9C
0xD9A
0xD98
0xD96
0xD94
0xD92
0xD90
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0xDAE
0xDAC
0xDAA
0xDA8
0xDA6
0xDA4
0xDA2
0xDA0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I2CINT2A
I2CINT1A
–
–
–
–
–
–
(I2C-A)
(I2C-A)
0xDBE
0xDBC
0xDBA
0xDB8
0xDB6
0xDB4
0xDB2
0xDB0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SCITXINTA
SCIRXINTA
(SCI-A)
–
–
–
–
–
–
(SCI-A)
0xDCE
0xDCC
0xDCA
0xDC8
0xDC6
0xDC4
0xDC2
0xDC0
ADCINT8
ADCINT7
ADCINT6
ADCINT5
ADCINT4
ADCINT3
ADCINT2
ADCINT1
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
(ADC)
0xDDE
0xDDC
0xDDA
0xDD8
0xDD6
0xDD4
0xDD2
0xDD0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0xDEE
0xDEC
0xDEA
0xDE8
0xDE6
0xDE4
0xDE2
0xDE0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
XINT3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ext. Int. 3
0xDFE
0xDFC
0xDFA
0xDF8
0xDF6
0xDF4
0xDF2
0xDF0
Out of 96 possible interrupts, some interrupts are not used. These interrupts are reserved for future devices. These interrupts can be
used as software interrupts if they are enabled at the PIEIFRx level, provided none of the interrupts within the group is being used by a
peripheral. Otherwise, interrupts coming in from peripherals may be lost by accidentally clearing their flag while modifying the PIEIFR.
To summarize, there are two safe cases when the reserved interrupts could be used as software interrupts:
• No peripheral within the group is asserting interrupts.
• No peripheral interrupts are assigned to the group (e.g., PIE groups 5, 7, or 11) .
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 3-13. PIE Configuration and Control Registers
NAME
SIZE (x16)
PIECTRL
0x0CE0
1
PIE, Control Register
PIEACK
0x0CE1
1
PIE, Acknowledge Register
PIEIER1
0x0CE2
1
PIE, INT1 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR1
0x0CE3
1
PIE, INT1 Group Flag Register
PIEIER2
0x0CE4
1
PIE, INT2 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR2
0x0CE5
1
PIE, INT2 Group Flag Register
PIEIER3
0x0CE6
1
PIE, INT3 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR3
0x0CE7
1
PIE, INT3 Group Flag Register
PIEIER4
0x0CE8
1
PIE, INT4 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR4
0x0CE9
1
PIE, INT4 Group Flag Register
PIEIER5
0x0CEA
1
PIE, INT5 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR5
0x0CEB
1
PIE, INT5 Group Flag Register
PIEIER6
0x0CEC
1
PIE, INT6 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR6
0x0CED
1
PIE, INT6 Group Flag Register
PIEIER7
0x0CEE
1
PIE, INT7 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR7
0x0CEF
1
PIE, INT7 Group Flag Register
PIEIER8
0x0CF0
1
PIE, INT8 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR8
0x0CF1
1
PIE, INT8 Group Flag Register
PIEIER9
0x0CF2
1
PIE, INT9 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR9
0x0CF3
1
PIE, INT9 Group Flag Register
PIEIER10
0x0CF4
1
PIE, INT10 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR10
0x0CF5
1
PIE, INT10 Group Flag Register
PIEIER11
0x0CF6
1
PIE, INT11 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR11
0x0CF7
1
PIE, INT11 Group Flag Register
PIEIER12
0x0CF8
1
PIE, INT12 Group Enable Register
PIEIFR12
0x0CF9
1
PIE, INT12 Group Flag Register
Reserved
0x0CFA –
0x0CFF
6
Reserved
(1)
3.6.1
DESCRIPTION (1)
ADDRESS
The PIE configuration and control registers are not protected by EALLOW mode. The PIE vector table
is protected.
External Interrupts
Table 3-14. External Interrupt Registers
NAME
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
XINT1CR
0x00 7070
1
XINT1 configuration register
XINT2CR
0x00 7071
1
XINT2 configuration register
XINT3CR
0x00 7072
1
XINT3 configuration register
XINT1CTR
0x00 7078
1
XINT1 counter register
XINT2CTR
0x00 7079
1
XINT2 counter register
XINT3CTR
0x00 707A
1
XINT3 counter register
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
35
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Each external interrupt can be enabled/disabled or qualified using positive, negative, or both positive and
negative edge. For more information, see the TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control
and Interrupts Reference Guide (literature number SPRUFN3).
3.7
VREG/BOR/POR
Although the core and I/O circuitry operate on two different voltages, these devices have an on-chip
voltage regulator (VREG) to generate the VDD voltage from the VDDIO supply. This eliminates the cost and
space of a second external regulator on an application board. Additionally, internal power-on reset (POR)
and brown-out reset (BOR) circuits monitor both the VDD and VDDIO rails during power-up and run mode.
3.7.1
On-chip Voltage Regulator (VREG)
A linear regulator generates the core voltage (VDD) from the VDDIO supply. Therefore, although capacitors
are required on each VDD pin to stabilize the generated voltage, power need not be supplied to these pins
to operate the device. Conversely, the VREG can be disabled, should power or redundancy be the
primary concern of the application.
3.7.1.1
Using the On-chip VREG
To utilize the on-chip VREG, the VREGENZ pin should be tied low and the appropriate recommended
operating voltage should be supplied to the VDDIO and VDDA pins. In this case, the VDD voltage needed by
the core logic will be generated by the VREG. Each VDD pin requires on the order of 1.2 mF (minimum)
capacitance for proper regulation of the VREG. These capacitors should be located as close as possible
to the VDD pins.
3.7.1.2
Disabling the On-chip VREG
To conserve power, it is also possible to disable the on-chip VREG and supply the core logic voltage to
the VDD pins with a more efficient external regulator. To enable this option, the VREGENZ pin must be tied
high.
3.7.2
On-chip Power-On Reset (POR) and Brown-Out Reset (BOR) Circuit
Two on-chip supervisory circuits, the power-on reset (POR) and the brown-out reset (BOR) remove the
burden of monitoring the VDD and VDDIO supply rails from the application board. The purpose of the POR is
to create a clean reset throughout the device during the entire power-up procedure. The trip point is a
looser, lower trip point than the BOR, which watches for dips in the VDD or VDDIO rail during device
operation. The POR function is present on both VDD and VDDIO rails at all times. After initial device
power-up, the BOR function is present on VDDIO at all times, and on VDD when the internal VREG is
enabled (VREGENZ pin is tied low). Both functions tie the XRS pin low when one of the voltages is below
their respective trip point. Additionally, when the internal voltage regulator is enabled, an over-voltage
protection circuit will tie XRS low if the VDD rail rises above its trip point. See Section 6 for the various trip
points as well as the delay time for the device to release the XRS pin after the under/over-voltage
condition is removed. Figure 3-9 shows the VREG, POR, and BOR. To disable both the VDD and VDDIO
BOR functions, a bit is provided in the BORCFG register. Refer to the TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx
Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide (literature number SPRUFN3) for details.
36
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
In
I/O Pin
Out
(Force Hi-Z When High)
DIR (0 = Input, 1 = Output)
SYSRS
Internal
Weak PU
SYSCLKOUT
Deglitch
Filter
XRS
Sync RS
MCLKRS
PLL
+
Clocking
Logic
XRS
Pin
C28
Core
JTAG
TCK
Detect
Logic
VREGHALT
(A)
WDRST
(B)
PBRS
A.
B.
POR/BOR
Generating
Module
On-Chip
Voltage
Regulator
(VREG)
VREGENZ
WDRST is the reset signal from the CPU-watchdog.
PBRS is the reset signal from the POR/BOR module.
Figure 3-9. VREG + POR + BOR + Reset Signal Connectivity
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
37
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.8
www.ti.com
System Control
This section describes the oscillator and clocking mechanisms, the watchdog function and the low power
modes.
Table 3-15. PLL, Clocking, Watchdog, and Low-Power Mode Registers
NAME
DESCRIPTION (1)
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
BORCFG
0x00 0985
1
BOR Configuration Register
XCLK
0x00 7010
1
XCLKOUT Control
PLLSTS
0x00 7011
1
PLL Status Register
CLKCTL
0x00 7012
1
Clock Control Register
PLLLOCKPRD
0x00 7013
1
PLL Lock Period
INTOSC1TRIM
0x00 7014
1
Internal Oscillator 1 Trim Register
INTOSC2TRIM
0x00 7016
1
Internal Oscillator 2 Trim Register
LOSPCP
0x00 701B
1
Low-Speed Peripheral Clock Prescaler Register
PCLKCR0
0x00 701C
1
Peripheral Clock Control Register 0
PCLKCR1
0x00 701D
1
Peripheral Clock Control Register 1
LPMCR0
0x00 701E
1
Low Power Mode Control Register 0
PCLKCR3
0x00 7020
1
Peripheral Clock Control Register 3
PLLCR
0x00 7021
1
PLL Control Register
SCSR
0x00 7022
1
System Control and Status Register
WDCNTR
0x00 7023
1
Watchdog Counter Register
WDKEY
0x00 7025
1
Watchdog Reset Key Register
WDCR
0x00 7029
1
Watchdog Control Register
(1)
38
All registers in this table are EALLOW protected.
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Figure 3-10 shows the various clock domains that are discussed. Figure 3-11 shows the various clock
sources (both internal and external) that can provide a clock for device operation.
SYSCLKOUT
LOSPCP
(System Ctrl Regs)
PCLKCR0/1/3
(System Ctrl Regs)
Clock Enables
I/O
SPI-A, SCI-A
C28x Core
CLKIN
LSPCLK
Peripheral
Registers
PF2
Peripheral
Registers
PF1
Peripheral
Registers
PF1
Peripheral
Registers
PF2
Clock Enables
I/O
GPIO
Mux
eCAP1
Clock Enables
I/O
ePWM1/.../4
Clock Enables
I2C-A
I/O
Clock Enables
16 Ch
ADC
Registers
PF2
PF0
Analog
GPIO
Mux
Clock Enables
6
A.
12-Bit ADC
COMP1/2
COMP
Registers
PF1
CLKIN is the clock into the CPU. It is passed out of the CPU as SYSCLKOUT (that is, CLKIN is the same frequency
as SYSCLKOUT).
Figure 3-10. Clock and Reset Domains
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
39
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
CLKCTL[WDCLKSRCSEL]
Internal
OSC 1
(10 MHz)
(A)
INTOSC1TRIM Reg
0
OSC1CLK
OSCCLKSRC1
WDCLK
CPU-Watchdog
(OSC1CLK on XRS reset)
OSCE
1
CLKCTL[INTOSC1OFF]
1 = Turn OSC Off
CLKCTL[OSCCLKSRCSEL]
CLKCTL[INTOSC1HALT]
WAKEOSC
1 = Ignore HALT
0
Internal OSC2CLK
OSC 2
(10 MHz)
(A)
INTOSC2TRIM Reg
OSCCLK
PLL
Missing-Clock-Detect Circuit
(OSC1CLK on XRS reset)
(B)
1
OSCE
CLKCTL[TRM2CLKPRESCALE]
CLKCTL[TMR2CLKSRCSEL]
1 = Turn OSC Off
10
CLKCTL[INTOSC2OFF]
11
1 = Ignore HALT
Prescale
/1, /2, /4,
/8, /16
01, 10, 11
CPUTMR2CLK
01
1
00
CLKCTL[INTOSC2HALT]
SYSCLKOUT
OSCCLKSRC2
0
0 = GPIO38
1 = GPIO19
XCLK[XCLKINSEL]
SYNC
Edge
Detect
CLKCTL[OSCCLKSRC2SEL]
CLKCTL[XCLKINOFF]
0
XCLKIN
GPIO19
or
GPIO38
1
0
XCLKIN
X1
EXTCLK
(Crystal)
OSC
XTAL
WAKEOSC
(Oscillators enabled when this signal is high)
X2
CLKCTL[XTALOSCOFF]
A.
B.
0 = OSC on (default on reset)
1 = Turn OSC off
Register loaded from TI OTP-based calibration function.
See Section 3.8.4 for details on missing clock detection.
Figure 3-11. Clock Tree
40
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
3.8.1
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Internal Zero Pin Oscillators
The F2802x devices contain two independent internal zero pin oscillators. By default both oscillators are
turned on at power up, and internal oscillator 1 is the default clock source at this time. For power savings,
unused oscillators may be powered down by the user. The center frequency of these oscillators is
determined by their respective oscillator trim registers, written to in the calibration routine as part of the
boot ROM execution. See Section 6, Electrical Specifications, for more information on these oscillators.
3.8.2
Crystal Oscillator Option
The typical specifications for the external quartz crystal (fundamental mode, parallel resonant) are listed in
Table 3-16. Furthermore, ESR range = 30 to 150 Ω.
Table 3-16. Typical Specifications for External Quartz Crystal (1)
(1)
FREQUENCY (MHz)
Rd (Ω)
CL1 (pF)
CL2 (pF)
5
2200
18
18
10
470
15
15
15
0
15
15
20
0
12
12
Cshunt should be less than or equal to 5 pF.
XCLKIN/GPIO19/38
Turn off
XCLKIN path
in CLKCTL
register
A.
X1
X2
Rd
CL1
Crystal
CL2
X1/X2 pins are available in 48-pin package only.
Figure 3-12. Using the On-chip Crystal Oscillator
NOTE
1. CL1 and CL2 are the total capacitance of the circuit board and components excluding the
IC and crystal. The value is usually approximately twice the value of the crystal's load
capacitance.
2. The load capacitance of the crystal is described in the crystal specifications of the
manufacturers.
3. TI recommends that customers have the resonator/crystal vendor characterize the
operation of their device with the MCU chip. The resonator/crystal vendor has the
equipment and expertise to tune the tank circuit. The vendor can also advise the
customer regarding the proper tank component values that will produce proper start up
and stability over the entire operating range.
XCLKIN/GPIO19/38
External Clock Signal
(Toggling 0−VDDIO)
X1
X2
NC
Figure 3-13. Using a 3.3-V External Oscillator
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
41
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.8.3
www.ti.com
PLL-Based Clock Module
The devices have an on-chip, PLL-based clock module. This module provides all the necessary clocking
signals for the device, as well as control for low-power mode entry. The PLL has a 4-bit ratio control
PLLCR[DIV] to select different CPU clock rates. The watchdog module should be disabled before writing
to the PLLCR register. It can be re-enabled (if need be) after the PLL module has stabilized, which takes
1 ms. The input clock and PLLCR[DIV] bits should be chosen in such a way that the output frequency of
the PLL (VCOCLK) is at least 50 MHz.
Table 3-17. PLL Settings
PLLCR[DIV] VALUE (1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
SYSCLKOUT (CLKIN)
(2)
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 0 or 1 (3)
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 2
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 3
0000 (PLL bypass)
OSCCLK/4 (Default) (1)
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK
0001
(OSCCLK * 1)/4
(OSCCLK * 1)/2
(OSCCLK * 1)/1
0010
(OSCCLK * 2)/4
(OSCCLK * 2)/2
(OSCCLK * 2)/1
0011
(OSCCLK * 3)/4
(OSCCLK * 3)/2
(OSCCLK * 3)/1
0100
(OSCCLK * 4)/4
(OSCCLK * 4)/2
(OSCCLK * 4)/1
0101
(OSCCLK * 5)/4
(OSCCLK * 5)/2
(OSCCLK * 5)/1
0110
(OSCCLK * 6)/4
(OSCCLK * 6)/2
(OSCCLK * 6)/1
0111
(OSCCLK * 7)/4
(OSCCLK * 7)/2
(OSCCLK * 7)/1
1000
(OSCCLK * 8)/4
(OSCCLK * 8)/2
(OSCCLK * 8)/1
1001
(OSCCLK * 9)/4
(OSCCLK * 9)/2
(OSCCLK * 9)/1
1010
(OSCCLK * 10)/4
(OSCCLK * 10)/2
(OSCCLK * 10)/1
1011
(OSCCLK * 11)/4
(OSCCLK * 11)/2
(OSCCLK * 11)/1
1100
(OSCCLK * 12)/4
(OSCCLK * 12)/2
(OSCCLK * 12)/1
The PLL control register (PLLCR) and PLL Status Register (PLLSTS) are reset to their default state by the XRS signal or a watchdog
reset only. A reset issued by the debugger or the missing clock detect logic has no effect.
This register is EALLOW protected. See the TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide
(literature number SPRUFN3) for more information.
By default, PLLSTS[DIVSEL] is configured for /4. (The boot ROM changes this to /1.) PLLSTS[DIVSEL] must be 0 before writing to the
PLLCR and should be changed only after PLLSTS[PLLLOCKS] = 1.
Table 3-18. CLKIN Divide Options
PLLSTS [DIVSEL]
CLKIN DIVIDE
0
/4
1
/4
2
/2
3
/1
The PLL-based clock module provides four modes of operation:
• INTOSC1 (Internal Zero-pin Oscillator 1): This is the on-chip internal oscillator 1. This can provide
the clock for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2
• INTOSC2 (Internal Zero-pin Oscillator 2): This is the on-chip internal oscillator 2. This can provide
the clock for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2. Both INTOSC1 and INTOSC2 can be
independently chosen for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2.
• Crystal/Resonator Operation: The on-chip (crystal) oscillator enables the use of an external
crystal/resonator attached to the device to provide the time base. The crystal/resonator is connected to
the X1/X2 pins. Some devices may not have the X1/X2 pins. See Table 2-2 for details.
• External Clock Source Operation: If the on-chip (crystal) oscillator is not used, this mode allows it to
be bypassed. The device clocks are generated from an external clock source input on the XCLKIN pin.
Note that the XCLKIN is multiplexed with GPIO19 or GPIO38 pin. The XCLKIN input can be selected
as GPIO19 or GPIO38 via the XCLKINSEL bit in XCLK register. The CLKCTL[XCLKINOFF] bit
42
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
disables this clock input (forced low). If the clock source is not used or the respective pins are used as
GPIOs, the user should disable at boot time.
Before changing clock sources, ensure that the target clock is present. If a clock is not present, then that
clock source must be disabled (using the CLKCTL register) before switching clocks.
Table 3-19. Possible PLL Configuration Modes
REMARKS
PLLSTS[DIVSEL]
CLKIN AND
SYSCLKOUT
PLL Off
Invoked by the user setting the PLLOFF bit in the PLLSTS register. The PLL block
is disabled in this mode. This can be useful to reduce system noise and for low
power operation. The PLLCR register must first be set to 0x0000 (PLL Bypass)
before entering this mode. The CPU clock (CLKIN) is derived directly from the
input clock on either X1/X2, X1 or XCLKIN.
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK/4
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK/1
PLL Bypass
PLL Bypass is the default PLL configuration upon power-up or after an external
reset (XRS). This mode is selected when the PLLCR register is set to 0x0000 or
while the PLL locks to a new frequency after the PLLCR register has been
modified. In this mode, the PLL itself is bypassed but the PLL is not turned off.
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK/4
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK/1
PLL Enable
Achieved by writing a non-zero value n into the PLLCR register. Upon writing to the
PLLCR the device will switch to PLL Bypass mode until the PLL locks.
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK * n/4
OSCCLK * n/2
OSCCLK * n/1
PLL MODE
3.8.4
Loss of Input Clock (NMI Watchdog Function)
The 2802x devices may be clocked from either one of the internal zero-pin oscillators
(INTOSC1/INTOSC2), the on-chip crystal oscillator, or from an external clock input. Regardless of the
clock source, in PLL-enabled and PLL-bypass mode, if the input clock to the PLL vanishes, the PLL will
issue a limp-mode clock at its output. This limp-mode clock continues to clock the CPU and peripherals at
a typical frequency of 1–5 MHz.
When the limp mode is activated, a CLOCKFAIL signal is generated that is latched as an NMI interrupt.
Depending on how the NMIRESETSEL bit has been configured, a reset to the device can be fired
immediately or the NMI watchdog counter can issue a reset when it overflows. In addition to this, the
Missing Clock Status (MCLKSTS) bit is set. The NMI interrupt could be used by the application to detect
the input clock failure and initiate necessary corrective action such as switching over to an alternative
clock source (if available) or initiate a shut-down procedure for the system.
If the software does not respond to the clock-fail condition, the NMI watchdog triggers a reset after a
preprogrammed time interval. Figure 3-14 shows the interrupt mechanisms involved.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
43
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
NMIFLG[NMINT]
NMIFLGCLR[NMINT]
Clear
Latch
Set Clear
XRS
NMINT
Generate
Interrupt
Pulse
When
Input = 1
1
0
NMIFLG[CLOCKFAIL]
Clear
Latch
Clear Set
0
NMIFLGCLR[CLOCKFAIL]
CLOCKFAIL
SYNC?
SYSCLKOUT
NMICFG[CLOCKFAIL]
XRS
NMIFLGFRC[CLOCKFAIL]
SYSCLKOUT
SYSRS
NMIWDPRD[15:0]
NMIWDCNT[15:0]
NMI Watchdog
NMIRS
See System
Control Section
Figure 3-14. NMI-watchdog
3.8.5
CPU-Watchdog Module
The CPU-watchdog module on the 2802x device is similar to the one used on the 281x/280x/283xx
devices. This module generates an output pulse, 512 oscillator clocks wide (OSCCLK), whenever the 8-bit
watchdog up counter has reached its maximum value. To prevent this, the user must disable the counter
or the software must periodically write a 0x55 + 0xAA sequence into the watchdog key register that resets
the watchdog counter. Figure 3-15 shows the various functional blocks within the watchdog module.
Normally, when the input clocks are present, the CPU-watchdog counter decrements to initiate a
CPU-watchdog reset or WDINT interrupt. However, when the external input clock fails, the CPU-watchdog
counter stops decrementing (i.e., the watchdog counter does not change with the limp-mode clock).
NOTE
The CPU-watchdog is different from the NMI watchdog. It is the legacy watchdog that is
present in all 28x devices.
NOTE
Applications in which the correct CPU operating frequency is absolutely critical should
implement a mechanism by which the MCU will be held in reset, should the input clocks ever
fail. For example, an R-C circuit may be used to trigger the XRS pin of the MCU, should the
capacitor ever get fully charged. An I/O pin may be used to discharge the capacitor on a
periodic basis to prevent it from getting fully charged. Such a circuit would also help in
detecting failure of the flash memory.
44
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
WDCR (WDPS[2:0])
WDCR (WDDIS)
WDCNTR(7:0)
WDCLK
Watchdog
Prescaler
/512
WDCLK
8-Bit
Watchdog
Counter
CLR
Clear Counter
Internal
Pullup
WDKEY(7:0)
Watchdog
55 + AA
Key Detector
WDRST
Generate
Output Pulse
WDINT
(512 OSCCLKs)
Good Key
XRS
Core-reset
WDCR (WDCHK[2:0])
WDRST(A)
A.
1
0
Bad
WDCHK
Key
SCSR (WDENINT)
1
The WDRST signal is driven low for 512 OSCCLK cycles.
Figure 3-15. CPU-watchdog Module
The WDINT signal enables the watchdog to be used as a wakeup from IDLE/STANDBY mode.
In STANDBY mode, all peripherals are turned off on the device. The only peripheral that remains
functional is the CPU-watchdog. This module will run off OSCCLK. The WDINT signal is fed to the LPM
block so that it can wake the device from STANDBY (if enabled). See Section 3.9, Low-power Modes
Block, for more details.
In IDLE mode, the WDINT signal can generate an interrupt to the CPU, via the PIE, to take the CPU out of
IDLE mode.
In HALT mode, the CPU-watchdog can be used to wake up the device through a device reset.
Functional Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
45
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
3.9
www.ti.com
Low-power Modes Block
Table 3-20 summarizes the various modes.
Table 3-20. Low-power Modes
EXIT (1)
MODE
LPMCR0(1:0)
OSCCLK
CLKIN
SYSCLKOUT
IDLE
00
On
On
On
XRS, CPU-watchdog interrupt, any
enabled interrupt
STANDBY
01
On
(CPU-watchdog still running)
Off
Off
XRS, CPU-watchdog interrupt, GPIO
Port A signal, debugger (2)
1X
Off
(on-chip crystal oscillator and
PLL turned off, zero-pin oscillator
and CPU-watchdog state
dependent on user code.)
Off
Off
XRS, GPIO Port A signal, debugger (2),
CPU-watchdog
HALT (3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
The Exit column lists which signals or under what conditions the low power mode is exited. A low signal, on any of the signals, exits the
low power condition. This signal must be kept low long enough for an interrupt to be recognized by the device. Otherwise, the low-power
mode will not be exited and the device will go back into the indicated low power mode.
The JTAG port can still function even if the CPU clock (CLKIN) is turned off.
The WDCLK must be active for the device to go into HALT mode.
The various low-power modes operate as follows:
IDLE Mode:
This mode is exited by any enabled interrupt that is recognized by the
processor. The LPM block performs no tasks during this mode as long as
the LPMCR0(LPM) bits are set to 0,0.
STANDBY Mode:
Any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake the device from STANDBY
mode. The user must select which signal(s) will wake the device in the
GPIOLPMSEL register. The selected signal(s) are also qualified by the
OSCCLK before waking the device. The number of OSCCLKs is specified in
the LPMCR0 register.
HALT Mode:
CPU-watchdog, XRS, and any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake
the device from HALT mode. The user selects the signal in the
GPIOLPMSEL register.
NOTE
The low-power modes do not affect the state of the output pins (PWM pins included). They
will be in whatever state the code left them in when the IDLE instruction was executed. See
the TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference
Guide (literature number SPRUFN3) for more details.
46
Functional Overview
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4 Peripherals
4.1
Analog Block
A 12-bit ADC core is implemented that has different timings than the 12-bit ADC used on F280x/F2833x.
The ADC wrapper is modified to incorporate the new timings and also other enhancements to improve the
timing control of start of conversions. Figure 4-1 shows the interaction of the analog module with the rest
of the F2802x system.
38-Pin
48-Pin
VDDA
VDDA
(3.3 V) VDDA
(Agnd) VSSA
VREFLO
VREFLO VREFLO
Tied To Tied To
VSSA
VSSA
Interface Reference
Diff
VREFHI VREFHI
Tied To Tied To
A0
A0
VREFHI
A0
B0
A1
A2
A1
B1
A2
A3
A4
A6
A6
A7
B1
B2
B2
B4
B4
B6
B6
B3
B7
Signal Pinout
A2
Simultaneous Sampling Channels
A4
B2
COMP1OUT
AIO2
AIO10
10-Bit
DAC
Comp1
A3
B3
A4
B4
ADC
COMP2OUT
AIO4
AIO12
10-Bit
DAC
Comp2
(See Note A)
B5
Temperature Sensor
A5
A6
B6
AIO6
AIO14
A7
B7
A.
Comparator 2 is only available on the 48-pin PT package.
Figure 4-1. Analog Pin Configurations
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
47
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4.1.1
www.ti.com
ADC
4.1.1.1
Features
The core of the ADC contains a single 12-bit converter fed by two sample-and-hold circuits. The
sample-and-hold circuits can be sampled simultaneously or sequentially. These, in turn, are fed by a total
of up to 13 analog input channels. The converter can be configured to run with an internal bandgap
reference to create true-voltage based conversions or with a pair of external voltage references
(VREFHI/VREFLO) to create ratiometric-based conversions.
Contrary to previous ADC types, this ADC is not sequencer-based. It is easy for the user to create a
series of conversions from a single trigger. However, the basic principle of operation is centered around
the configurations of individual conversions, called SOCs, or Start-Of-Conversions.
Functions of the ADC module include:
• 12-bit ADC core with built-in dual sample-and-hold (S/H)
• Simultaneous sampling or sequential sampling modes
• Full range analog input: 0 V to 3.3 V fixed, or VREFHI/VREFLO ratiometric. The digital value of the input
analog voltage is derived by:
– Internal Reference (VREFLO = VSSA. VREFHI must not exceed VDDA when using either internal or
external reference modes.)
Digital Value = 0,
when input £ 0 V
Digital Value = 4096 ´
Input Analog Voltage - VREFLO
3.3
Digital Value = 4095,
when 0 V < input < 3.3 V
when input ³ 3.3 V
– External Reference (VREFHI/VREFLO connected to external references. VREFHI must not exceed VDDA
when using either internal or external reference modes.)
when input £ 0 V
Digital Value = 0,
Digital Value = 4096 ´
Digital Value = 4095,
•
•
•
•
•
•
48
Input Analog Voltage - VREFLO
VREFHI - VREFLO
when 0 V < input < VREFHI
when input ³ VREFHI
Runs at full system clock, no prescaling required
Up to 16-channel, multiplexed inputs
16 SOCs, configurable for trigger, sample window, and channel
16 result registers (individually addressable) to store conversion values
Multiple trigger sources
– S/W – software immediate start
– ePWM 1–7
– GPIO XINT2
– CPU Timers 0/1/2
– ADCINT1/2
9 flexible PIE interrupts, can configure interrupt request after any conversion
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 4-1. ADC Configuration and Control Registers
ADDRESS
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
ADCCTL1
0x7100
1
Yes
Control 1 Register
ADCINTFLG
0x7104
1
No
Interrupt Flag Register
ADCINTFLGCLR
0x7105
1
No
Interrupt Flag Clear Register
ADCINTOVF
0x7106
1
No
Interrupt Overflow Register
ADCINTOVFCLR
0x7107
1
No
Interrupt Overflow Clear Register
ADCINTSEL1AND2
0x7108
1
Yes
Interrupt 1 and 2 Selection Register
ADCINTSEL3AND4
0x7109
1
Yes
Interrupt 3 and 4 Selection Register
ADCINTSEL5AND6
0x710A
1
Yes
Interrupt 5 and 6 Selection Register
ADCINTSEL7AND8
0x710B
1
Yes
Interrupt 7 and 8 Selection Register
ADCINTSEL9AND10
0x710C
1
Yes
Interrupt 9 Selection Register (reserved Interrupt 10 Selection)
ADCSOCPRIORITYCTL
0x7110
1
Yes
SOC Priority Control Register
ADCSAMPLEMODE
0x7112
1
Yes
Sampling Mode Register
ADCINTSOCSEL1
0x7114
1
Yes
Interrupt SOC Selection 1 Register (for 8 channels)
ADCINTSOCSEL2
0x7115
1
Yes
Interrupt SOC Selection 2 Register (for 8 channels)
ADCSOCFLG1
0x7118
1
No
SOC Flag 1 Register (for 16 channels)
ADCSOCFRC1
0x711A
1
No
SOC Force 1 Register (for 16 channels)
ADCSOCOVF1
0x711C
1
No
SOC Overflow 1 Register (for 16 channels)
ADCSOCOVFCLR1
0x711E
1
No
SOC Overflow Clear 1 Register (for 16 channels)
0x7120 –
0x712F
1
Yes
SOC0 Control Register to SOC15 Control Register
ADCREFTRIM
0x7140
1
Yes
Reference Trim Register
ADCOFFTRIM
0x7141
1
Yes
Offset Trim Register
ADCREV
0x714F
1
No
Revision Register
REGISTER NAME
ADCSOC0CTL to
ADCSOC15CTL
DESCRIPTION
Table 4-2. ADC Result Registers (Mapped to PF0)
REGISTER NAME
ADCRESULT0 to
ADCRESULT15
ADDRESS
0xB00 –
0xB0F
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
1
No
DESCRIPTION
ADC Result 0 Register to ADC Result 15 Register
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
49
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
0-Wait
Result
Registers
PF0 (CPU)
PF2 (CPU)
SYSCLKOUT
ADCENCLK
ADCINT 1
PIE
ADCINT 9
AIO
MUX
ADC
Channels
ADC
Core
12-Bit
ADCTRIG 1
ADCTRIG 2
ADCTRIG 3
ADCTRIG 4
ADCTRIG 5
ADCTRIG 6
ADCTRIG 7
ADCTRIG 8
ADCTRIG 9
ADCTRIG 10
ADCTRIG 11
ADCTRIG 12
TINT 0
TINT 1
TINT 2
XINT 2SOC
CPUTIMER 0
CPUTIMER 1
CPUTIMER 2
XINT 2
SOCA 1
SOCB 1
ePWM 1
SOCA 2
SOCB 2
ePWM 2
SOCA 3
SOCB 3
ePWM 3
SOCA 4
SOCB 4
ePWM 4
Figure 4-2. ADC Connections
ADC Connections if the ADC is Not Used
It is recommended that the connections for the analog power pins be kept, even if the ADC is not used.
Following is a summary of how the ADC pins should be connected, if the ADC is not used in an
application:
• VDDA – Connect to VDDIO
• VSSA – Connect to VSS
• VREFLO – Connect to VSS
• ADCINAn, ADCINBn, VREFHI – Connect to VSSA
When the ADC module is used in an application, unused ADC input pins should be connected to analog
ground (VSSA).
NOTE: Unused ADCIN pins that are multiplexed with AIO function should not be directly connected to
analog ground. They should be grounded through a 1-kΩ resistor. This is to prevent an errant code from
configuring these pins as AIO outputs and driving grounded pins to a logic-high state.
When the ADC is not used, be sure that the clock to the ADC module is not turned on to realize power
savings.
50
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.1.2
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
ADC MUX
To COMPy A or B input
To ADC Channel X
Logic implemented in GPIO MUX block
AIOx Pin
SYSCLK
AIOxIN
1
AIOxINE
AIODAT Reg
(Read)
SYNC
0
AIODAT Reg
(Latch)
AIOxDIR
(1 = Input,
0 = Output)
AIOMUX 1 Reg
AIOSET,
AIOCLEAR,
AIOTOGGLE
Regs
AIODIR Reg
(Latch)
1
(0 = Input, 1 = Output)
0
0
Figure 4-3. AIOx Pin Multiplexing
The ADC channel and Comparator functions are always available. The digital I/O function is available only
when the respective bit in the AIOMUX1 register is 0. In this mode, reading the AIODAT register reflects
the actual pin state.
The digital I/O function is disabled when the respective bit in the AIOMUX1 register is 1. In this mode,
reading the AIODAT register reflects the output latch of the AIODAT register and the input digital I/O buffer
is disabled to prevent analog signals from generating noise.
On reset, the digital function is disabled. If the pin is used as an analog input, users should keep the AIO
function disabled for that pin.
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
51
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4.1.3
www.ti.com
Comparator Block
Figure 4-4 shows the interaction of the Comparator modules with the rest of the system.
COMP x A
COMP x B
+
COMP
-
GPIO
MUX
TZ1/2/3
COMP x
+
DAC x
Wrapper
AIO
MUX
ePWM
COMPxOUT
DAC
Core
10-Bit
Figure 4-4. Comparator Block Diagram
Table 4-3. Comparator Control Registers
REGISTER
NAME
COMP1
ADDRESS
COMP2
ADDRESS (1)
SIZE (x16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
DESCRIPTION
COMPCTL
0x6400
0x6420
1
Yes
Comparator Control Register
COMPSTS
0x6402
0x6422
1
No
Comparator Status Register
DACVAL
0x6406
0x6426
1
Yes
DAC Value Register
(1)
52
Comparator 2 is only available on the 48-pin PT package.
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.2
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Module
The device includes the four-pin serial peripheral interface (SPI) module. One SPI module (SPI-A) is
available. The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream of
programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmable
bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for communications between the MCU and external peripherals
or another processor. Typical applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices
such as shift registers, display drivers, and ADCs. Multidevice communications are supported by the
master/slave operation of the SPI.
The SPI module features include:
• Four external pins:
– SPISOMI: SPI slave-output/master-input pin
– SPISIMO: SPI slave-input/master-output pin
– SPISTE: SPI slave transmit-enable pin
– SPICLK: SPI serial-clock pin
NOTE: All four pins can be used as GPIO if the SPI module is not used.
• Two operational modes: master and slave
Baud rate: 125 different programmable rates.
•
•
•
•
•
Baud rate =
LSPCLK
(SPIBRR + 1)
when SPIBRR = 3 to 127
Baud rate =
LSPCLK
4
when SPIBRR = 0, 1, 2
Data word length: one to sixteen data bits
Four clocking schemes (controlled by clock polarity and clock phase bits) include:
– Falling edge without phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data on the falling edge of the
SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.
– Falling edge with phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the
falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.
– Rising edge without phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data on the rising edge of the
SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.
– Rising edge with phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the
falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.
Simultaneous receive and transmit operation (transmit function can be disabled in software)
Transmitter and receiver operations are accomplished through either interrupt-driven or polled
algorithms.
Nine SPI module control registers: Located in control register frame beginning at address 7040h.
NOTE
All registers in this module are 16-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2.
When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte
(15–8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.
Enhanced feature:
• 4-level transmit/receive FIFO
• Delayed transmit control
• Bi-directional 3 wire SPI mode support
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
53
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
The SPI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4. SPI-A Registers
(1)
54
DESCRIPTION (1)
NAME
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
SPICCR
0x7040
1
No
SPI-A Configuration Control Register
SPICTL
0x7041
1
No
SPI-A Operation Control Register
SPISTS
0x7042
1
No
SPI-A Status Register
SPIBRR
0x7044
1
No
SPI-A Baud Rate Register
SPIRXEMU
0x7046
1
No
SPI-A Receive Emulation Buffer Register
SPIRXBUF
0x7047
1
No
SPI-A Serial Input Buffer Register
SPITXBUF
0x7048
1
No
SPI-A Serial Output Buffer Register
SPIDAT
0x7049
1
No
SPI-A Serial Data Register
SPIFFTX
0x704A
1
No
SPI-A FIFO Transmit Register
SPIFFRX
0x704B
1
No
SPI-A FIFO Receive Register
SPIFFCT
0x704C
1
No
SPI-A FIFO Control Register
SPIPRI
0x704F
1
No
SPI-A Priority Control Register
Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined
results.
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Figure 4-5 is a block diagram of the SPI in slave mode.
SPIFFENA
SPIFFTX.14
Receiver
Overrun Flag
RX FIFO Registers
SPISTS.7
Overrun
INT ENA
SPICTL.4
SPIRXBUF
RX FIFO _0
RX FIFO _1
-----
SPIINT
RX FIFO Interrupt
RX FIFO _3
RX Interrupt
Logic
16
SPIRXBUF
Buffer Register
SPIFFOVF
FLAG
SPIFFRX.15
To CPU
TX FIFO Registers
SPITXBUF
TX FIFO _3
SPITX
16
16
TX Interrupt
Logic
TX FIFO Interrupt
----TX FIFO _1
TX FIFO _0
SPI INT
ENA
SPI INT FLAG
SPITXBUF
Buffer Register
SPISTS.6
SPICTL.0
TRIWIRE
SPIPRI.0
16
M
M
SPIDAT
Data Register
TW
S
S
SPIDAT.15 - 0
SW1
SPISIMO
M TW
M
TW
S
S
SPISOMI
SW2
Talk
SPICTL.1
SPISTE
State Control
Master/Slave
SPICCR.3 - 0
SPI Char
3
2
M
SPI Bit Rate
SW3
S
SPIBRR.6 - 0
LSPCLK
6
A.
SPICTL.2
S
0
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
Clock
Polarity
Clock
Phase
SPICCR.6
SPICTL.3
SPICLK
M
SPISTE is driven low by the master for a slave device.
Figure 4-5. SPI Module Block Diagram (Slave Mode)
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
55
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4.3
www.ti.com
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module
The devices include one serial communications interface (SCI) module (SCI-A). The SCI module supports
digital communications between the CPU and other asynchronous peripherals that use the standard
non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. The SCI receiver and transmitter are double-buffered, and each has its
own separate enable and interrupt bits. Both can be operated independently or simultaneously in the
full-duplex mode. To ensure data integrity, the SCI checks received data for break detection, parity,
overrun, and framing errors. The bit rate is programmable to over 65000 different speeds through a 16-bit
baud-select register.
Features of each SCI module include:
• Two external pins:
– SCITXD: SCI transmit-output pin
– SCIRXD: SCI receive-input pin
NOTE: Both pins can be used as GPIO if not used for SCI.
– Baud rate programmable to 64K different rates:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baud rate =
LSPCLK
(BRR + 1) * 8
when BRR ¹ 0
Baud rate =
LSPCLK
16
when BRR = 0
Data-word format
– One start bit
– Data-word length programmable from one to eight bits
– Optional even/odd/no parity bit
– One or two stop bits
Four error-detection flags: parity, overrun, framing, and break detection
Two wake-up multiprocessor modes: idle-line and address bit
Half- or full-duplex operation
Double-buffered receive and transmit functions
Transmitter and receiver operations can be accomplished through interrupt-driven or polled algorithms
with status flags.
– Transmitter: TXRDY flag (transmitter-buffer register is ready to receive another character) and TX
EMPTY flag (transmitter-shift register is empty)
– Receiver: RXRDY flag (receiver-buffer register is ready to receive another character), BRKDT flag
(break condition occurred), and RX ERROR flag (monitoring four interrupt conditions)
Separate enable bits for transmitter and receiver interrupts (except BRKDT)
NRZ (non-return-to-zero) format
NOTE
All registers in this module are 8-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2.
When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte
(15–8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.
Enhanced features:
• Auto baud-detect hardware logic
• 4-level transmit/receive FIFO
56
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
The SCI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. SCI-A Registers (1)
NAME
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
SCICCRA
0x7050
1
No
SCI-A Communications Control Register
SCICTL1A
0x7051
1
No
SCI-A Control Register 1
SCIHBAUDA
0x7052
1
No
SCI-A Baud Register, High Bits
SCILBAUDA
0x7053
1
No
SCI-A Baud Register, Low Bits
SCICTL2A
0x7054
1
No
SCI-A Control Register 2
SCIRXSTA
0x7055
1
No
SCI-A Receive Status Register
SCIRXEMUA
0x7056
1
No
SCI-A Receive Emulation Data Buffer Register
SCIRXBUFA
0x7057
1
No
SCI-A Receive Data Buffer Register
SCITXBUFA
0x7059
1
No
SCI-A Transmit Data Buffer Register
(2)
0x705A
1
No
SCI-A FIFO Transmit Register
SCIFFRXA (2)
0x705B
1
No
SCI-A FIFO Receive Register
SCIFFCTA (2)
0x705C
1
No
SCI-A FIFO Control Register
SCIPRIA
0x705F
1
No
SCI-A Priority Control Register
SCIFFTXA
(1)
(2)
DESCRIPTION
Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2 space. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce
undefined results.
These registers are new registers for the FIFO mode.
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
57
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Figure 4-6 shows the SCI module block diagram.
SCICTL1.1
SCITXD
Frame Format and Mode
Parity
Even/Odd Enable
TXSHF
Register
TXENA
8
SCICCR.6 SCICCR.5
TXRDY
TXWAKE
SCICTL1.3
1
Transmitter-Data
Buffer Register
8
TX INT ENA
SCICTL2.7
SCICTL2.0
TX FIFO
Interrupts
TX FIFO _0
TX FIFO _1
TXINT
TX Interrupt
Logic
To CPU
-----
TX FIFO _3
WUT
SCITXD
TX EMPTY
SCICTL2.6
SCI TX Interrupt select logic
SCITXBUF.7-0
TX FIFO registers
SCIFFENA
AutoBaud Detect logic
SCIFFTX.14
SCIHBAUD. 15 - 8
Baud Rate
MSbyte
Register
SCIRXD
RXSHF
Register
SCIRXD
RXWAKE
LSPCLK
SCIRXST.1
SCILBAUD. 7 - 0
Baud Rate
LSbyte
Register
RXENA
8
SCICTL1.0
SCICTL2.1
Receive Data
Buffer register
SCIRXBUF.7-0
RXRDY
8
BRKDT
RX FIFO _3
-----
RX FIFO_1
RX FIFO _0
SCIRXBUF.7-0
RX/BK INT ENA
SCIRXST.6
RX FIFO
Interrupts
SCIRXST.5
RX Interrupt
Logic
RX FIFO registers
SCIRXST.7
SCIRXST.4 - 2
RX Error
FE OE PE
RXINT
To CPU
RXFFOVF
SCIFFRX.15
RX Error
RX ERR INT ENA
SCICTL1.6
SCI RX Interrupt select logic
Figure 4-6. Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module Block Diagram
58
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.4
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The device contains one I2C Serial Port. Figure 4-7 shows how the I2C peripheral module interfaces
within the device.
The I2C module has the following features:
• Compliance with the Philips Semiconductors I2C-bus specification (version 2.1):
– Support for 1-bit to 8-bit format transfers
– 7-bit and 10-bit addressing modes
– General call
– START byte mode
– Support for multiple master-transmitters and slave-receivers
– Support for multiple slave-transmitters and master-receivers
– Combined master transmit/receive and receive/transmit mode
– Data transfer rate of from 10 kbps up to 400 kbps (I2C Fast-mode rate)
• One 4-word receive FIFO and one 4-word transmit FIFO
• One interrupt that can be used by the CPU. This interrupt can be generated as a result of one of the
following conditions:
– Transmit-data ready
– Receive-data ready
– Register-access ready
– No-acknowledgment received
– Arbitration lost
– Stop condition detected
– Addressed as slave
• An additional interrupt that can be used by the CPU when in FIFO mode
• Module enable/disable capability
• Free data format mode
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
59
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
I2C Module
I2CXSR
I2CDXR
TX FIFO
FIFO Interrupt to
CPU/PIE
SDA
RX FIFO
Peripheral Bus
I2CRSR
SCL
I2CDRR
Clock
Synchronizer
Control/Status
Registers
CPU
Prescaler
Noise Filters
Interrupt to
CPU/PIE
I2C INT
Arbitrator
A.
B.
The I2C registers are accessed at the SYSCLKOUT rate. The internal timing and signal waveforms of the I2C port are
also at the SYSCLKOUT rate.
The clock enable bit (I2CAENCLK) in the PCLKCRO register turns off the clock to the I2C port for low power
operation. Upon reset, I2CAENCLK is clear, which indicates the peripheral internal clocks are off.
Figure 4-7. I2C Peripheral Module Interfaces
The registers in Table 4-6 configure and control the I2C port operation.
Table 4-6. I2C-A Registers
60
NAME
ADDRESS
EALLOW
PROTECTED
I2COAR
0x7900
No
I2C own address register
I2CIER
0x7901
No
I2C interrupt enable register
I2CSTR
0x7902
No
I2C status register
DESCRIPTION
I2CCLKL
0x7903
No
I2C clock low-time divider register
I2CCLKH
0x7904
No
I2C clock high-time divider register
I2CCNT
0x7905
No
I2C data count register
I2CDRR
0x7906
No
I2C data receive register
I2CSAR
0x7907
No
I2C slave address register
I2CDXR
0x7908
No
I2C data transmit register
I2CMDR
0x7909
No
I2C mode register
I2CISRC
0x790A
No
I2C interrupt source register
I2CPSC
0x790C
No
I2C prescaler register
I2CFFTX
0x7920
No
I2C FIFO transmit register
I2CFFRX
0x7921
No
I2C FIFO receive register
I2CRSR
–
No
I2C receive shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
I2CXSR
–
No
I2C transmit shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.5
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM1/2/3/4)
The devices contain up to four enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM). Figure 4-8 shows a block diagram of
multiple ePWM modules. Figure 4-9 shows the signal interconnections with the ePWM. See the
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) Module Reference Guide
(literature number SPRUGE9) for more details.
Table 4-7 shows the complete ePWM register set per module.
EPWMSYNCI
EPWM1SYNCI
EPWM1B
EPWM1TZINT
ePWM1
Module
EPWM1INT
TZ1 to TZ3
EPWM2TZINT
PIE
EPWM2INT
TZ5
EPWMxTZINT
TZ6
EPWMxINT
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
EPWM1ENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
eCAPI
EPWM1SYNCO
EPWM1SYNCO
EPWM2SYNCI
COMPOUT1
COMPOUT2
TZ1 to TZ3
EPWM2B
ePWM2
Module
COMP
TZ5
TZ6
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
EPWM2ENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
EPWM1A
H
R
P
W
M
EPWM2A
EPWMxA
G
P
I
O
ADC
Peripheral Bus
EPWM2SYNCO
SOCA1
SOCB1
SOCA2
M
U
X
EPWMxB
EPWMxSYNCI
SOCB2
SOCAx
TZ1 to TZ3
ePWMx
Module
SOCBx
TZ5
TZ6
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
EPWMxENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
System Control
C28x CPU
SOCA1
SOCA2
SPCAx
ADCSOCAO
Pulse Stretch
(32 SYSCLKOUT Cycles, Active-Low Output)
SOCB1
SOCB2
SPCBx
ADCSOCBO
Pulse Stretch
(32 SYSCLKOUT Cycles, Active-Low Output)
Figure 4-8. ePWM
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
61
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 4-7. ePWM Control and Status Registers
ePWM1
ePWM2
ePWM3
ePWM4
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
TBCTL
0x6800
0x6840
0x6880
0x68C0
1/0
Time Base Control Register
TBSTS
0x6801
0x6841
0x6881
0x68C1
1/0
Time Base Status Register
TBPHSHR
0x6802
0x6842
0x6882
0x68C2
1/0
Time Base Phase HRPWM Register
TBPHS
0x6803
0x6843
0x6883
0x68C3
1/0
Time Base Phase Register
TBCTR
0x6804
0x6844
0x6884
0x68C4
1/0
Time Base Counter Register
TBPRD
0x6805
0x6845
0x6885
0x68C5
1/1
Time Base Period Register Set
TBPRDHR
0x6806
0x6846
0x6886
0x68C6
1/1
Time Base Period High Resolution Register (1)
CMPCTL
0x6807
0x6847
0x6887
0x68C7
1/0
Counter Compare Control Register
CMPAHR
0x6808
0x6848
0x6888
0x68C8
1/1
Time Base Compare A HRPWM Register
CMPA
0x6809
0x6849
0x6889
0x68C9
1/1
Counter Compare A Register Set
CMPB
0x680A
0x684A
0x688A
0x68CA
1/1
Counter Compare B Register Set
NAME
DESCRIPTION
AQCTLA
0x680B
0x684B
0x688B
0x68CB
1/0
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output A
AQCTLB
0x680C
0x684C
0x688C
0x68CC
1/0
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output B
AQSFRC
0x680D
0x684D
0x688D
0x68CD
1/0
Action Qualifier Software Force Register
AQCSFRC
0x680E
0x684E
0x688E
0x68CE
1/1
Action Qualifier Continuous S/W Force Register Set
DBCTL
0x680F
0x684F
0x688F
0x68CF
1/1
Dead-Band Generator Control Register
DBRED
0x6810
0x6850
0x6890
0x68D0
1/0
Dead-Band Generator Rising Edge Delay Count Register
DBFED
0x6811
0x6851
0x6891
0x68D1
1/0
Dead-Band Generator Falling Edge Delay Count Register
TZSEL
0x6812
0x6852
0x6892
0x68D2
1/0
Trip Zone Select Register (1)
TZDCSEL
0x6813
0x6853
0x6893
0x98D3
1/0
Trip Zone Digital Compare Register
TZCTL
0x6814
0x6854
0x6894
0x68D4
1/0
Trip Zone Control Register (1)
TZEINT
0x6815
0x6855
0x6895
0x68D5
1/0
Trip Zone Enable Interrupt Register (1)
TZFLG
0x6816
0x6856
0x6896
0x68D6
1/0
Trip Zone Flag Register
TZCLR
0x6817
0x6857
0x6897
0x68D7
1/0
Trip Zone Clear Register (1)
TZFRC
0x6818
0x6858
0x6898
0x68D8
1/0
Trip Zone Force Register (1)
(1)
ETSEL
0x6819
0x6859
0x6899
0x68D9
1/0
Event Trigger Selection Register
ETPS
0x681A
0x685A
0x689A
0x68DA
1/0
Event Trigger Prescale Register
ETFLG
0x681B
0x685B
0x689B
0x68DB
1/0
Event Trigger Flag Register
ETCLR
0x681C
0x685C
0x689C
0x68DC
1/0
Event Trigger Clear Register
ETFRC
0x681D
0x685D
0x689D
0x68DD
1/0
Event Trigger Force Register
PCCTL
0x681E
0x685E
0x689E
0x68DE
1/0
PWM Chopper Control Register
HRCNFG
0x6820
0x6860
0x68A0
0x68E0
1/0
HRPWM Configuration Register (1)
(1)
62
Registers that are EALLOW protected.
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 4-7. ePWM Control and Status Registers (continued)
ePWM1
ePWM2
ePWM3
ePWM4
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
HRPWR
0x6821
-
-
-
1/0
HRPWM Power Register
HRMSTEP
0x6826
-
-
-
1/0
HRPWM MEP Step Register
HRPCTL
0x6828
0x6868
0x68A8
0x68E8
1/0
High resolution Period Control Register (1)
NAME
(2)
TBPRDHRM
0x682A
0x686A
0x68AA
0x68EA
1/W
TBPRDM
0x682B
0x686B
0x68AB
0x68EB
1 / W (2)
(2)
DESCRIPTION
Time Base Period HRPWM Register Mirror
Time Base Period Register Mirror
CMPAHRM
0x682C
0x686C
0x68AC
0x68EC
1/W
CMPAM
0x682D
0x686D
0x68AD
0x68ED
1 / W (2)
DCTRIPSEL
0x6830
0x6870
0x68B0
0x68F0
1/0
Digital Compare Trip Select Register
DCACTL
0x6831
0x6871
0x68B1
0x68F1
1/0
Digital Compare A Control Register (1)
DCBCTL
0x6832
0x6872
0x68B2
0x68F2
1/0
Digital Compare B Control Register (1)
DCFCTL
0x6833
0x6873
0x68B3
0x68F3
1/0
Digital Compare Filter Control Register (1)
DCCAPCT
0x6834
0x6874
0x68B4
0x68F4
1/0
Digital Compare Capture Control Register (1)
DCFOFFSET
0x6835
0x6875
0x68B5
0x68F5
1/1
Digital Compare Filter Offset Register
DCFOFFSETCNT
0x6836
0x6876
0x68B6
0x68F6
1/0
Digital Compare Filter Offset Counter Register
DCFWINDOW
0x6837
0x6877
0x68B7
0x68F7
1/0
Digital Compare Filter Window Register
DCFWINDOWCNT
0x6838
0x6878
0x68B8
0x68F8
1/0
Digital Compare Filter Window Counter Register
DCCAP
0x6839
0x6879
0x68B9
0x68F9
1/1
Digital Compare Counter Capture Register
(2)
Compare A HRPWM Register Mirror
Compare A Register Mirror
(1)
W = Write to shadow register
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Peripherals
63
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Time-Base (TB)
CTR=ZERO
TBPRD Shadow (24)
TBPRD Active (24)
Sync
In/Out
Select
Mux
CTR=CMPB
TBPRDHR (8)
Disabled
EPWMxSYNCO
8
CTR=PRD
TBCTL[SYNCOSEL]
TBCTL[PHSEN]
Counter
Up/Down
(16 Bit)
TBCTL[SWFSYNC]
(Software Forced
Sync)
CTR=ZERO
TCBNT
Active (16)
CTR_Dir
CTR=PRD
CTR=ZERO
CTR=PRD or ZERO
CTR=CMPA
TBPHSHR (8)
16
8
TBPHS Active (24)
Phase
Control
CTR=CMPB
CTR_Dir
DCAEVT1.soc
DCBEVT1.soc
CTR=CMPA
EPWMxSYNCI
DCAEVT1.sync
DCBEVT1.sync
(A)
EPWMxINT
Event
Trigger
and
Interrupt
(ET)
EPWMxSOCA
EPWMxSOCB
EPWMxSOCA
(A)
ADC
EPWMxSOCB
Action
Qualifier
(AQ)
CMPAHR (8)
16
High-resolution PWM (HRPWM)
CMPA Active (24)
CMPA Shadow (24)
EPWMxA
EPWMA
Dead
Band
(DB)
CTR=CMPB
PWM
Chopper
(PC)
Trip
Zone
(TZ)
16
CMPB Active (16)
EPWMxB
EPWMB
EPWMxTZINT
CMPB Shadow (16)
TZ1 to TZ3
CTR=ZERO
DCAEVT1.inter
DCBEVT1.inter
DCAEVT2.inter
DCBEVT2.inter
EMUSTOP
CLOCKFAIL
DCAEVT1.force
DCAEVT2.force
DCBEVT1.force
DCBEVT2.force
A.
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
These events are generated by the Type 1 ePWM digital compare (DC) submodule based on the levels of
the COMPxOUT and TZ signals.
Figure 4-9. ePWM Sub-Modules Showing Critical Internal Signal Interconnections
64
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.6
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
High-Resolution PWM (HRPWM)
This module combines multiple delay lines in a single module and a simplified calibration system by using
a dedicated calibration delay line. For each ePWM module there is one HR delay line.
The HRPWM module offers PWM resolution (time granularity) that is significantly better than what can be
achieved using conventionally derived digital PWM methods. The key points for the HRPWM module are:
• Significantly extends the time resolution capabilities of conventionally derived digital PWM
• This capability can be utilized in both single edge (duty cycle and phase-shift control) as well as dual
edge control for frequency/period modulation.
• Finer time granularity control or edge positioning is controlled via extensions to the Compare A and
Phase registers of the ePWM module.
• HRPWM capabilities, when available on a particular device, are offered only on the A signal path of an
ePWM module (i.e., on the EPWMxA output). EPWMxB output has conventional PWM capabilities.
NOTE
The minimum SYSCLKOUT frequency allowed for HRPWM is 50 MHz.
NOTE
When dual-edge high-resolution is enabled (high-resolution period mode), the PWMxB output
is not available for use.
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
65
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4.7
www.ti.com
Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP1)
SYNC
The device contains an enhanced capture (eCAP) module. Figure 4-10 shows a functional block diagram
of a module.
SYNCIn
SYNCOut
CTRPHS
(phase register−32 bit)
TSCTR
(counter−32 bit)
APWM mode
OVF
RST
CTR_OVF
CTR [0−31]
Delta−mode
PWM
compare
logic
PRD [0−31]
CMP [0−31]
32
CTR=PRD
CTR [0−31]
CTR=CMP
32
32
CAP1
(APRD active)
APRD
shadow
32
32
LD
LD1
MODE SELECT
PRD [0−31]
Polarity
select
32
CMP [0−31]
CAP2
(ACMP active)
32
LD
LD2
32
CAP3
(APRD shadow)
LD
32
CAP4
(ACMP shadow)
LD
Polarity
select
Event
qualifier
ACMP
shadow
eCAPx
Event
Pre-scale
Polarity
select
LD3
LD4
Polarity
select
4
Capture events
4
CEVT[1:4]
to PIE
Interrupt
Trigger
and
Flag
control
CTR_OVF
Continuous /
Oneshot
Capture Control
CTR=PRD
CTR=CMP
Figure 4-10. eCAP Functional Block Diagram
The eCAP module is clocked at the SYSCLKOUT rate.
The clock enable bits (ECAP1 ENCLK) in the PCLKCR1 register turn off the eCAP module individually (for
low power operation). Upon reset, ECAP1ENCLK is set to low, indicating that the peripheral clock is off.
66
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 4-8. eCAP Control and Status Registers
NAME
eCAP1
SIZE (x16)
TSCTR
0x6A00
2
EALLOW PROTECTED
Time-Stamp Counter
DESCRIPTION
CTRPHS
0x6A02
2
Counter Phase Offset Value Register
CAP1
0x6A04
2
Capture 1 Register
CAP2
0x6A06
2
Capture 2 Register
CAP3
0x6A08
2
Capture 3 Register
CAP4
0x6A0A
2
Capture 4 Register
Reserved
0x6A0C – 0x6A12
8
Reserved
ECCTL1
0x6A14
1
Capture Control Register 1
ECCTL2
0x6A15
1
Capture Control Register 2
ECEINT
0x6A16
1
Capture Interrupt Enable Register
ECFLG
0x6A17
1
Capture Interrupt Flag Register
ECCLR
0x6A18
1
Capture Interrupt Clear Register
ECFRC
0x6A19
1
Capture Interrupt Force Register
Reserved
0x6A1A – 0x6A1F
6
Reserved
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
67
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
4.8
www.ti.com
JTAG Port
On the 2802x device, the JTAG port is reduced to 5 pins (TRST, TCK, TDI, TMS, TDO). TCK, TDI, TMS
and TDO pins are also GPIO pins. The TRST signal selects either JTAG or GPIO operating mode for the
pins in Figure 4-11. During emulation/debug, the GPIO function of these pins are not available. If the
GPIO38/TCK/XCLKIN pin is used to provide an external clock, an alternate clock source should be used
to clock the device during emulation/debug since this pin will be needed for the TCK function.
NOTE
In 2802x devices, the JTAG pins may also be used as GPIO pins. Care should be taken in
the board design to ensure that the circuitry connected to these pins do not affect the
emulation capabilities of the JTAG pin function. Any circuitry connected to these pins should
not prevent the emulator from driving (or being driven by) the JTAG pins for successful
debug.
TRST = 0: JTAG Disabled (GPIO Mode)
TRST = 1: JTAG Mode
TRST
TRST
XCLKIN
GPIO38_in
TCK
TCK/GPIO38
GPIO38_out
C28x
Core
GPIO37_in
TDO/GPIO37
1
0
TDO
GPIO37_out
GPIO36_in
1
TMS
TMS/GPIO36
GPIO36_out
1
0
GPIO35_in
1
TDI
TDI/GPIO35
GPIO35_out
1
0
Figure 4-11. JTAG/GPIO Multiplexing
68
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
4.9
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
GPIO MUX
The GPIO MUX can multiplex up to three independent peripheral signals on a single GPIO pin in addition
to providing individual pin bit-banging I/O capability.
The device supports 22 GPIO pins. The GPIO control and data registers are mapped to Peripheral
Frame 1 to enable 32-bit operations on the registers (along with 16-bit operations). Table 4-9 shows the
GPIO register mapping.
Table 4-9. GPIO Registers
NAME
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
GPACTRL
0x6F80
2
GPIO A Control Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPAQSEL1
0x6F82
2
GPIO A Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)
GPAQSEL2
0x6F84
2
GPIO A Qualifier Select 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)
GPAMUX1
0x6F86
2
GPIO A MUX 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)
GPAMUX2
0x6F88
2
GPIO A MUX 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)
GPADIR
0x6F8A
2
GPIO A Direction Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO CONTROL REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)
GPAPUD
0x6F8C
2
GPIO A Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPBCTRL
0x6F90
2
GPIO B Control Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBQSEL1
0x6F92
2
GPIO B Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBMUX1
0x6F96
2
GPIO B MUX 1 Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBDIR
0x6F9A
2
GPIO B Direction Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBPUD
0x6F9C
2
GPIO B Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
AIOMUX1
0x6FB6
2
Analog, I/O mux 1 register (AIO0 to AIO15)
AIODIR
0x6FBA
2
Analog, I/O Direction Register (AIO0 to AIO15)
GPIO DATA REGISTERS (NOT EALLOW PROTECTED)
GPADAT
0x6FC0
2
GPIO A Data Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPASET
0x6FC2
2
GPIO A Data Set Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPACLEAR
0x6FC4
2
GPIO A Data Clear Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPATOGGLE
0x6FC6
2
GPIO A Data Toggle Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPBDAT
0x6FC8
2
GPIO B Data Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBSET
0x6FCA
2
GPIO B Data Set Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBCLEAR
0x6FCC
2
GPIO B Data Clear Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
GPBTOGGLE
0x6FCE
2
GPIO B Data Toggle Register (GPIO32 to 38 )
AIODAT
0x6FD8
2
Analog I/O Data Register (AIO0 to AIO15)
AIOSET
0x6FDA
2
Analog I/O Data Set Register (AIO0 to AIO15)
AIOCLEAR
0x6FDC
2
Analog I/O Data Clear Register (AIO0 to AIO15)
0x6FDE
2
Analog I/O Data Toggle Register (AIO0 to AIO15)
AIOTOGGLE
GPIO INTERRUPT AND LOW POWER MODES SELECT REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)
GPIOXINT1SEL
0x6FE0
1
XINT1 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIOXINT2SEL
0x6FE1
1
XINT2 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIOXINT3SEL
0x6FE2
1
XINT3 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIOLPMSEL
0x6FE8
2
LPM GPIO Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
NOTE
There is a two-SYSCLKOUT cycle delay from when the write to the GPxMUXn/AIOMUXn
and GPxQSELn registers occurs to when the action is valid.
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
69
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 4-10. GPIOA MUX (1) (2)
DEFAULT AT RESET
PRIMARY I/O
FUNCTION
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 1
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 2
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 3
GPAMUX1 REGISTER
BITS
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 00)
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 01)
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 10)
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO0
EPWM1A (O)
Reserved
Reserved
3-2
GPIO1
EPWM1B (O)
Reserved
COMP1OUT (O)
5-4
GPIO2
EPWM2A (O)
Reserved
Reserved
7-6
GPIO3
EPWM2B (O)
Reserved
COMP2OUT (3) (O)
9-8
GPIO4
EPWM3A (O)
Reserved
Reserved
11-10
GPIO5
EPWM3B (O)
Reserved
ECAP1 (I/O)
13-12
GPIO6
EPWM4A (O)
EPWMSYNCI (I)
EPWMSYNCO (O)
15-14
GPIO7
EPWM4B (O)
SCIRXDA (I)
Reserved
17-16
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
19-18
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
21-20
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
23-22
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
25-24
GPIO12
TZ1 (I)
SCITXDA (O)
Reserved
27-26
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
29-28
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
31-30
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
GPAMUX2 REGISTER
BITS
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 00)
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 01)
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 10)
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO16
SPISIMOA (I/O)
Reserved
TZ2 (I)
3-2
GPIO17
SPISOMIA (I/O)
Reserved
TZ3 (I)
5-4
GPIO18
SPICLKA (I/O)
SCITXDA (O)
XCLKOUT (O)
7-6
GPIO19/XCLKIN
SPISTEA (I/O)
SCIRXDA (I)
ECAP1 (I/O)
9-8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
11-10
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
13-12
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
15-14
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
17-16
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
19-18
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
21-20
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
23-22
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
25-24
GPIO28
SCIRXDA (I)
SDAA (I/OD)
TZ2 (I)
27-26
GPIO29
SCITXDA (O)
SCLA (I/OD)
TZ3 (I)
29-28
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
31-30
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(1)
(2)
(3)
70
The word reserved means that there is no peripheral assigned to this GPxMUX1/2 register setting. Should it be selected, the state of the
pin will be undefined and the pin may be driven. This selection is a reserved configuration for future expansion.
I = Input, O = Output, OD = Open Drain
These functions are not available in the 38-pin package.
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 4-11. GPIOB MUX (1)
DEFAULT AT RESET
PRIMARY I/O FUNCTION
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 1
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 2
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 3
GPBMUX1 REGISTER
BITS
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 00)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 01)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 10)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO32 (2)
SDAA (2) (I/OD)
EPWMSYNCI (2) (I)
3-2
(2)
GPIO33
5-4
(1)
(2)
SCLA
(2)
(I/OD)
EPWMSYNCO
(2)
(O)
ADCSOCAO
(2)
(O)
ADCSOCBO
(2)
(O)
GPIO34
COMP2OUT (O)
Reserved
Reserved
7-6
GPIO35 (TDI)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
9-8
GPIO36 (TMS)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
11-10
GPIO37 (TDO)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
13-12
GPIO38/XCLKIN (TCK)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
15-14
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
17-16
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
19-18
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
21-20
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
23-22
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
25-24
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
27-26
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
29-28
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
31-30
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I = Input, O = Output, OD = Open Drain
These pins are not available in the 38-pin package.
Table 4-12. Analog MUX (1)
DEFAULT AT RESET
AIOx AND PERIPHERAL SELECTION 1
PERIPHERAL SELECTION 2 AND
PERIPHERAL SELECTION 3
AIOMUX1 REGISTER BITS
AIOMUX1 BITS = 0,x
AIOMUX1 BITS = 1,x
1-0
ADCINA0 (I)
3-2
5-4
7-6
(2)
(I)
AIO2 (I/O)
ADCINA3
(2)
AIO4 (I/O)
11-10
ADCINA5 (I)
13-12
AIO6 (I/O)
17-16
19-18
21-20
23-22
ADCINA7
(2)
(2)
(2)
(I)
ADCINA3
(2)
(I)
(I)
(I)
ADCINA7
(2)
(I)
ADCINB0 (I)
ADCINB1
(2)
(I)
ADCINB2 (I), COMP1B (I)
ADCINB3
(2)
(I)
AIO12 (I/O)
27-26
ADCINB5 (I)
ADCINB5 (I)
29-28
AIO14 (I/O)
ADCINB6 (I)
31-30
ADCINB7
(I)
ADCINA5 (I)
25-24
(2)
(3)
ADCINA6 (I)
(I)
AIO10 (I/O)
ADCINB3
(2)
ADCINA4 (I), COMP2A
ADCINB0 (I)
ADCINB1
ADCINA0 (I)
ADCINA1
ADCINA2 (I), COMP1A (I)
(I)
9-8
15-14
(1)
(2)
(3)
ADCINA1
(I)
ADCINB4 (I), COMP2B
ADCINB7
(2)
(3)
(I)
(I)
I = Input, O = Output
These pins are not available in the 38-pin package.
These functions are not available in the 38-pin package.
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
71
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
The user can select the type of input qualification for each GPIO pin via the GPxQSEL1/2 registers from
four choices:
• Synchronization To SYSCLKOUT Only (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0, 0): This is the default mode of all GPIO pins
at reset and it simply synchronizes the input signal to the system clock (SYSCLKOUT).
• Qualification Using Sampling Window (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0, 1 and 1, 0): In this mode the input signal,
after synchronization to the system clock (SYSCLKOUT), is qualified by a specified number of cycles
before the input is allowed to change.
• The sampling period is specified by the QUALPRD bits in the GPxCTRL register and is configurable in
groups of 8 signals. It specifies a multiple of SYSCLKOUT cycles for sampling the input signal. The
sampling window is either 3-samples or 6-samples wide and the output is only changed when ALL
samples are the same (all 0s or all 1s) as shown in Figure 4-18 (for 6 sample mode).
• No Synchronization (GPxQSEL1/2 = 1,1): This mode is used for peripherals where synchronization is
not required (synchronization is performed within the peripheral).
Due to the multi-level multiplexing that is required on the device, there may be cases where a peripheral
input signal can be mapped to more then one GPIO pin. Also, when an input signal is not selected, the
input signal will default to either a 0 or 1 state, depending on the peripheral.
72
Peripherals
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
GPIOXINT1SEL
GPIOLMPSEL
GPIOXINT2SEL
LPMCR0
GPIOXINT3SEL
External Interrupt
MUX
Low P ower
Modes Block
Asynchronous
path
PIE
GPxDAT (read)
GPxQSEL1/2
GPxCTRL
GPxPUD
Input
Qualification
Internal
Pullup
00
N/C
01
Peripheral 1 Input
10
Peripheral 2 Input
11
Peripheral 3 Input
GPxTOGGLE
Asynchronous path
GPIOx pin
GPxCLEAR
GPxSET
00
01
GPxDAT (latch)
Peripheral 1 Output
10
Peripheral 2 Output
11
Peripheral 3 Output
High Impedance
Output Control
00
0 = Input, 1 = Output
XRS
= Default at Reset
A.
B.
C.
GPxDIR (latch)
01
Peripheral 1 Output Enable
10
Peripheral 2 Output Enable
11
Peripheral 3 Output Enable
GPxMUX1/2
x stands for the port, either A or B. For example, GPxDIR refers to either the GPADIR and GPBDIR register
depending on the particular GPIO pin selected.
GPxDAT latch/read are accessed at the same memory location.
This is a generic GPIO MUX block diagram. Not all options may be applicable for all GPIO pins. See the
TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference Guide (literature number
SPRUFN3) for pin-specific variations.
Figure 4-12. GPIO Multiplexing
Peripherals
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
73
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
5 Device Support
Texas Instruments (TI) offers an extensive line of development tools for the C28x™ generation of MCUs,
including tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm
implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of 2802x-based applications:
Software Development Tools
• Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
– C/C++ Compiler
– Code generation tools
– Assembler/Linker
– Cycle Accurate Simulator
• Application algorithms
• Sample applications code
Hardware Development Tools
• Development and evaluation boards
• JTAG-based emulators - XDS510™ class, XDS560™ emulator, XDS100
• Flash programming tools
• Power supply
• Documentation and cables
5.1
Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
TMS320™ MCU devices and support tools. Each TMS320™ MCU commercial family member has one of
three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS (e.g., TMS320F28023). Texas Instruments recommends two of three
possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary
stages of product development from engineering prototypes (TMX/TMDX) through fully qualified
production devices/tools (TMS/TMDS).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not
completed quality and reliability verification
TMS
Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing
TMDS Fully qualified development-support product
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
74
Device Support
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, PT) and temperature range (for example, S). Figure 5-1 provides a legend for
reading the complete device name for any family member.
TMS 320
F 28023
PT
S
PREFIX
TMX = experimental device
TMP = prototype device
TMS = qualified device
TEMPERATURE RANGE
T = −40°C to 105°C
S = −40°C to 125°C
Q = −40°C to 125°C
(Q refers to Q100 qualification for automotive applications.)
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320 MCU Family
PACKAGE TYPE
48-Pin PT Plastic Quad Flatpack
38-Pin DA Plastic Small-outline Package
DEVICE
28027
28026
28023
28022
28021
28020
280200
TECHNOLOGY
F = Flash
Figure 5-1. Device Nomenclature
Device Support
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
75
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
5.2
www.ti.com
Related Documentation
Extensive documentation supports all of the TMS320™ MCU family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data
sheets and data manuals, with design specifications; and hardware and software applications.
Table 5-1 shows the peripheral reference guides appropriate for use with the devices in this data manual.
See the TMS320x28xx, 28xxx DSP Peripheral Reference Guide (literature number SPRU566) for more
information on types of peripherals.
Table 5-1. TMS320F2802x, TMS320F2802xx Peripheral Selection Guide
LIT. NO.
TYPE (1)
28027, 28026,
28023, 28022,
28021, 28020
280200
TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts
Reference Guide
SPRUFN3
–
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and
Comparator
SPRUGE5
3/0 (2)
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
SPRUGH1
0
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
SPRUG71
1
X
X
TMS320x2802x Piccolo Boot ROM
SPRUFN6
–
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM)
Module
SPRUGE9
1
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Module
SPRUFZ8
0
X
–
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
SPRUFZ9
0
X
X
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo High-Resolution Pulse-Width Modulator
(HRPWM)
SPRUGE8
1
X
–
PERIPHERAL
(1)
(2)
A type change represents a major functional feature difference in a peripheral module. Within a peripheral type, there may be minor
differences between devices that do not affect the basic functionality of the module. These device-specific differences are listed in the
peripheral reference guides.
The ADC module is Type 3 and the comparator module is Type 0.
The following documents can be downloaded from the TI website (www.ti.com):
Errata
SPRZ292
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022, TMS320F28021,
TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200 Piccolo MCU Silicon Errata describes known advisories
on silicon and provides workarounds.
CPU User's Guides
SPRU430
TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide describes the central processing
unit (CPU) and the assembly language instructions of the TMS320C28x fixed-point digital
signal processors (DSPs). It also describes emulation features available on these DSPs.
Peripheral Guides
SPRUFN3 TMS320x2802x/TMS320F2802xx Piccolo System Control and Interrupts Reference
Guide describes the various interrupts and system control features of the 2802x
microcontrollers (MCUs).
76
SPRU566
TMS320x28xx, 28xxx DSP Peripheral Reference Guide describes the peripheral reference
guides of the 28x digital signal processors (DSPs).
SPRUFN6
TMS320x2802x Piccolo Boot ROM Reference Guide describes the purpose and features
of the boot loader (factory-programmed boot-loading software) and provides examples of
code. It also describes other contents of the device on-chip boot ROM and identifies where
all of the information is located within that memory.
Device Support
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
SPRUGE5
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Comparator
Reference Guide describes how to configure and use the on-chip ADC module, which is a
12-bit pipelined ADC.
SPRUGE9
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) Module
Reference Guide describes the main areas of the enhanced pulse width modulator that
include digital motor control, switch mode power supply control, UPS (uninterruptible power
supplies), and other forms of power conversion.
SPRUGE8
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo High-Resolution Pulse Width Modulator (HRPWM)
describes the operation of the high-resolution extension to the pulse width modulator
(HRPWM).
SPRUGH1
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Reference Guide
describes how to use the SCI.
SPRUFZ8
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Module Reference Guide
describes the enhanced capture module. It includes the module description and registers.
SPRUG71
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Reference Guide
describes the SPI - a high-speed synchronous serial input/output (I/O) port - that allows a
serial bit stream of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the
device at a programmed bit-transfer rate.
SPRUFZ9
TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) Reference Guide describes
the features and operation of the inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module.
Tools Guides
SPRU513
TMS320C28x Assembly Language Tools v5.0.0 User's Guide describes the assembly
language tools (assembler and other tools used to develop assembly language code),
assembler directives, macros, common object file format, and symbolic debugging directives
for the TMS320C28x device.
5.3
SPRU514
TMS320C28x Optimizing C/C++ Compiler v5.0.0 User's Guide describes the
TMS320C28x™ C/C++ compiler. This compiler accepts ANSI standard C/C++ source code
and produces TMS320 DSP assembly language source code for the TMS320C28x device.
SPRU608
TMS320C28x Instruction Set Simulator Technical Overview describes the simulator,
available within the Code Composer Studio for TMS320C2000 IDE, that simulates the
instruction set of the C28x™ core.
Community Resources
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;
see TI's Terms of Use.
TI E2E Community TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration
among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas and
help solve problems with fellow engineers.
TI Embedded Processors Wiki Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help
developers get started with Embedded Processors from Texas Instruments and to foster
innovation and growth of general knowledge about the hardware and software surrounding
these devices.
Device Support
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
77
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6 Electrical Specifications
6.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings (1)
(2)
Supply voltage range, VDDIO (I/O and Flash)
with respect to VSS
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
Supply voltage range, VDD
with respect to VSS
–0.3 V to 2.5 V
Analog voltage range, VDDA
with respect to VSSA
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
Input voltage range, VIN (3.3 V)
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
Output voltage range, VO
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
Input clamp current, IIK (VIN < 0 or VIN > VDDIO) (3)
±20 mA
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDDIO)
±20 mA
Junction temperature range, TJ
(4)
Storage temperature range, Tstg
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
6.2
–40°C to 150°C
(4)
–65°C to 150°C
Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Section 6.2 is not implied.
Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
All voltage values are with respect to VSS, unless otherwise noted.
Continuous clamp current per pin is ± 2 mA.
Long-term high-temperature storage and/or extended use at maximum temperature conditions may result in a reduction of overall device
life. For additional information, see IC Package Thermal Metrics Application Report (literature number SPRA953) and Reliability Data for
TMS320LF24xx and TMS320F28xx Devices Application Report (literature number SPRA963).
Recommended Operating Conditions
Device supply voltage, I/O, VDDIO
(1) (2)
Device supply voltage CPU, VDD (When internal
VREG is disabled and 1.8 V is supplied externally)
MIN
NOM
2.97
1.71
2.97
3.3
Supply ground, VSS
Analog ground, VSSA
V
1.995
High-level output source current, VOH = VOH(MIN), IOH
Low-level output sink current, VOL = VOL(MAX), IOL
(4)
V
V
40
28022, 28023
2
50
28026, 28027
2
60
2
VDDIO + 0.3
VSS – 0.3
V
V
3.63
2
Low-level input voltage, VIL (3.3 V)
78
3.63
1.8
28020, 28021, 280200
High-level input voltage, VIH (3.3 V)
(3)
(4)
3.3
0
Device clock frequency (system clock)
(1)
(2)
UNIT
0
Analog supply voltage, VDDA (1)
Junction temperature, TJ
MAX
0.8
MHz
V
V
All GPIO/AIO pins
–4
mA
Group 2 (3)
–8
mA
All GPIO/AIO pins
4
mA
Group 2 (3)
8
mA
T version
–40
105
S version
–40
125
Q version
(Q100 Qualification)
–40
125
°C
VDDIO and VDDA should be maintained within ~0.3 V of each other.
A tolerance of ±10% may be used for VDDIO if the BOR is not used. See the TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023,
TMS320F28022, TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200 Piccolo MCU Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ292) for more
information. VDDIO tolerance is ±5% if the BOR is enabled.
Group 2 pins are as follows: GPIO16, GPIO17, GPIO18, GPIO19, GPIO28, GPIO29, GPIO36, GPIO37
TA (Ambient temperature) is product- and application-dependent and can go up to the specified TJ max of the device. See Section 6.5,
Thermal Design Considerations.
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
6.3
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Electrical Characteristics (1)
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VOH
High-level output voltage
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IIL
IIH
Input current
(low level)
Input current
(high level)
TEST CONDITIONS
IOH = IOH MAX
MIN
MAX UNIT
2.4
IOH = 50 mA
V
VDDIO – 0.2
IOL = IOL MAX
0.4
All GPIO/AIO
–80
–140
–205
–225
–290
–360
Pin with pullup
enabled
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = 0 V
Pin with pulldown
enabled
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = 0 V
±2
Pin with pullup
enabled
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = VDDIO
±2
Pin with pulldown
enabled
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = VDDIO
IOZ
Output current, pullup or
pulldown disabled
CI
Input capacitance
VDDIO BOR trip point
XRS pin
V
mA
mA
28
50
VO = VDDIO or 0 V
80
±2
2
Falling VDDIO
2.42
VDDIO BOR hysteresis
(1)
TYP
2.65
pF
3.135
35
Supervisor reset release delay
time
Time after BOR/POR/OVR event is removed to XRS
release
VREG VDD output
Internal VREG on
400
mA
V
mV
800
ms
1.9
V
When the on-chip VREG is used, its output is monitored by the POR/BOR circuit, which will reset the device should the core voltage
(VDD) go out of range.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
79
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.4
www.ti.com
Current Consumption
Table 6-1. TMS320F2802x/F280200 (1) Current Consumption at 40-MHz SYSCLKOUT
VREG ENABLED
MODE
TEST CONDITIONS
TYP
VREG DISABLED
IDDIO (2)
IDDA (3)
(4)
(4)
MAX
TYP
MAX
IDD
TYP
(4)
IDDIO
MAX
TYP
(4)
(2)
IDDA
MAX
TYP
(4)
(3)
MAX
Operational
(Flash)
The following peripheral clocks are
enabled:
•
ePWM1/2/3/4
•
eCAP1
•
SCI-A
•
SPI-A
•
ADC
•
I2C
•
COMP1/2
•
CPU Timer0/1/2
All PWM pins are toggled at 40 kHz.
All I/O pins are left unconnected. (5)
Code is running out of flash with
1 wait-state.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
70 mA
80 mA
13 mA
18 mA
62 mA
70 mA
15 mA
18 mA
13 mA
18 mA
IDLE
Flash is powered down.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
All peripheral clocks are off.
13 mA
16 mA
53 mA
58 mA
15 mA
17 mA
120 mA
400 mA
53 mA
58 mA
STANDBY
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
3 mA
6 mA
10 mA
15 mA
3 mA
6 mA
120 mA
400 mA
10 mA
15 mA
HALT
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
Input clock is disabled. (6)
50 mA
10 mA
15 mA
15 mA
10 mA
15 mA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
80
25 mA
For the TMS320F280200 device, subtract the IDD current number for eCAP (see Table 6-4) from IDD (VREG disabled)/IDDIO (VREG
enabled) current numbers shown in Table 6-1 for operational mode.
IDDIO current is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.
In order to realize the IDDA currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT, clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by
writing to the PCLKCR0 register.
The TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.
The following is done in a loop:
• Data is continuously transmitted out of SPI-A and SCI-A ports.
• The hardware multiplier is exercised.
• Watchdog is reset.
• ADC is performing continuous conversion.
• COMP1/2 are continuously switching voltages.
• GPIO17 is toggled.
If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the HALT mode shuts down the on-chip crystal oscillator.
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 6-2. TMS320F2802x Current Consumption at 50-MHz SYSCLKOUT
VREG ENABLED
MODE
TEST CONDITIONS
IDDIO (1)
VREG DISABLED
IDDA (2)
IDDIO (1)
IDD
IDDA (2)
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
Operational
(Flash)
The following peripheral clocks are
enabled:
•
ePWM1/2/3/4
•
eCAP1
•
SCI-A
•
SPI-A
•
ADC
•
I2C
•
COMP1/2
•
CPU Timer0/1/2
All PWM pins are toggled at 40 kHz.
All I/O pins are left unconnected. (4)
Code is running out of flash with
1 wait-state.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
80 mA
90 mA
13 mA
18 mA
71 mA
80 mA
15 mA
18 mA
13 mA
18 mA
IDLE
Flash is powered down.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
All peripheral clocks are off.
16 mA
19 mA
64 mA
69 mA
17 mA
20 mA
120 mA
400 mA
64 mA
69 mA
STANDBY
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
4 mA
7 mA
10 mA
15 mA
4 mA
7 mA
120 mA
400 mA
10 mA
15 mA
HALT
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
Input clock is disabled. (5)
50 mA
10 mA
15 mA
15 mA
10 mA
15 mA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
25 mA
IDDIO current is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.
In order to realize the IDDA currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT, clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by
writing to the PCLKCR0 register.
The TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.
The following is done in a loop:
• Data is continuously transmitted out of SPI-A and SCI-A ports.
• The hardware multiplier is exercised.
• Watchdog is reset.
• ADC is performing continuous conversion.
• COMP1/2 are continuously switching voltages.
• GPIO17 is toggled.
If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the HALT mode shuts down the on-chip crystal oscillator.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
81
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-3. TMS320F2802x Current Consumption at 60-MHz SYSCLKOUT
VREG ENABLED
MODE
IDDIO (1)
TEST CONDITIONS
VREG DISABLED
IDDA (2)
IDDIO (1)
IDD
IDDA (2)
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
TYP (3)
MAX
Operational
(Flash)
The following peripheral clocks
are enabled:
•
ePWM1/2/3/4
•
eCAP1
•
SCI-A
•
SPI-A
•
ADC
•
I2C
•
COMP1/2
•
CPU-TIMER0/1/2
All PWM pins are toggled at
60 kHz.
All I/O pins are left
unconnected. (4)
Code is running out of flash
with 2 wait-states.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
90 mA
100 mA
13 mA
18 mA
80 mA
90 mA
15 mA
18 mA
13 mA
18 mA
IDLE
Flash is powered down.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
All peripheral clocks are turned
off.
18 mA
23 mA
75 mA
80 mA
19 mA
24 mA
120 mA
400 mA
75 mA
80 mA
STANDBY
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
4 mA
7 mA
10 mA
15 mA
4 mA
7 mA
120 mA
400 mA
10 mA
15 mA
HALT
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
Input clock is disabled. (5)
50 mA
10 mA
15 mA
15 mA
10 mA
15 mA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
25 mA
IDDIO current is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.
In order to realize the IDDA currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT, clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by
writing to the PCLKCR0 register.
The TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.
The following is done in a loop:
• Data is continuously transmitted out of SPI-A and SCI-A ports.
• The hardware multiplier is exercised.
• Watchdog is reset.
• ADC is performing continuous conversion.
• COMP1/2 are continuously switching voltages.
• GPIO17 is toggled.
If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the HALT mode shuts down the on-chip crystal oscillator.
NOTE
The peripheral - I/O multiplexing implemented in the device prevents all available peripherals
from being used at the same time. This is because more than one peripheral function may
share an I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the
same time, although such a configuration is not useful. If this is done, the current drawn by
the device will be more than the numbers specified in the current consumption tables.
82
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
6.4.1
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Reducing Current Consumption
The 2802x/280200 devices incorporate a method to reduce the device current consumption. Since each
peripheral unit has an individual clock-enable bit, significant reduction in current consumption can be
achieved by turning off the clock to any peripheral module that is not used in a given application.
Furthermore, any one of the three low-power modes could be taken advantage of to reduce the current
consumption even further. Table 6-4 indicates the typical reduction in current consumption achieved by
turning off the clocks.
Table 6-4. Typical Current Consumption by Various
Peripherals (at 60 MHz) (1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
PERIPHERAL
MODULE (2)
IDD CURRENT
REDUCTION (mA)
ADC
2 (3)
I2C
3
ePWM
2
eCAP
2
SCI
2
SPI
2
COMP/DAC
1
HRPWM
3
CPU-TIMER
1
Internal zero-pin oscillator
0.5
All peripheral clocks (except CPU Timer clocks) are disabled upon
reset. Writing to/reading from peripheral registers is possible only
after the peripheral clocks are turned on.
For peripherals with multiple instances, the current quoted is per
module. For example, the 2 mA value quoted for ePWM is for one
ePWM module.
This number represents the current drawn by the digital portion of
the ADC module. Turning off the clock to the ADC module results in
the elimination of the current drawn by the analog portion of the ADC
(IDDA) as well.
NOTE
IDDIO current consumption is reduced by 15 mA (typical) when XCLKOUT is turned off.
NOTE
The baseline IDD current (current when the core is executing a dummy loop with no
peripherals enabled) is 45 mA, typical. To arrive at the IDD current for a given application, the
current-drawn by the peripherals (enabled by that application) must be added to the baseline
IDD current.
Following are other methods to reduce power consumption further:
• The flash module may be powered down if code is run off SARAM. This results in a current reduction
of 18 mA (typical) in the VDD rail and 13 mA (typical) in the VDDIO rail.
• Savings in IDDIO may be realized by disabling the pullups on pins that assume an output function.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
83
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.4.2
www.ti.com
Current Consumption Graphs (VREG Enabled)
Operational Current vs Frequency
100
Operational Current (mA)
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
SYSCLKOUT (MHz)
IDDIO (m A)
IDDA
Figure 6-1. Typical Operational Current Versus Frequency (F2802x/F280200)
Operational Pow er vs Frequency
Operational Power (mW)
450
400
350
300
250
200
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
SYSCLKOUT (MHz)
Figure 6-2. Typical Operational Power Versus Frequency (F2802x/F280200)
84
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
6.5
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Thermal Design Considerations
Based on the end application design and operational profile, the IDD and IDDIO currents could vary.
Systems that exceed the recommended maximum power dissipation in the end product may require
additional thermal enhancements. Ambient temperature (TA) varies with the end application and product
design. The critical factor that affects reliability and functionality is TJ, the junction temperature, not the
ambient temperature. Hence, care should be taken to keep TJ within the specified limits. Tcase should be
measured to estimate the operating junction temperature TJ. Tcase is normally measured at the center of
the package top-side surface. The thermal application reports IC Package Thermal Metrics (literature
number SPRA953) and Reliability Data for TMS320LF24xx and TMS320F28xx Devices (literature number
SPRA963) help to understand the thermal metrics and definitions.
6.6
Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the MCU
Figure 6-3 shows the connection between the MCU and JTAG header for a single-processor configuration.
If the distance between the JTAG header and the MCU is greater than 6 inches, the emulation signals
must be buffered. If the distance is less than 6 inches, buffering is typically not needed. Figure 6-3 shows
the simpler, no-buffering situation. For the pullup/pulldown resistor values, see Section 2.2, Signal
Descriptions.
6 inches or less
VDDIO
VDDIO
13
14
2
TRST
1
TMS
3
TDI
TDO
TCK
7
11
9
EMU0
PD
EMU1
TRST
GND
TMS
GND
TDI
GND
TDO
GND
TCK
GND
5
4
6
8
10
12
TCK_RET
MCU
JTAG Header
A.
See Figure 4-11 for JTAG/GPIO multiplexing.
Figure 6-3. Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the MCU
NOTE
The 2802x devices do not have EMU0/EMU1 pins. For designs that have a JTAG Header
on-board, the EMU0/EMU1 pins on the header must be tied to VDDIO through a 4.7-kΩ
(typical) resistor.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
85
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.7
www.ti.com
Timing Parameter Symbology
Timing parameter symbols used are created in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the
symbols, some of the pin names and other related terminology have been abbreviated as follows:
6.7.1
Lowercase subscripts and their
meanings:
Letters and symbols and their
meanings:
a
access time
H
High
c
cycle time (period)
L
Low
d
delay time
V
Valid
f
fall time
X
Unknown, changing, or don't care
level
h
hold time
Z
High impedance
r
rise time
su
setup time
t
transition time
v
valid time
w
pulse duration (width)
General Notes on Timing Parameters
All output signals from the 28x devices (including XCLKOUT) are derived from an internal clock such that
all output transitions for a given half-cycle occur with a minimum of skewing relative to each other.
The signal combinations shown in the following timing diagrams may not necessarily represent actual
cycles. For actual cycle examples, see the appropriate cycle description section of this document.
6.7.2
Test Load Circuit
This test load circuit is used to measure all switching characteristics provided in this document.
Tester Pin Electronics
42 W
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
Transmission Line
(A)
Z0 = 50 W
4.0 pF
A.
B.
Device Pin
1.85 pF
(B)
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the
device pin.
The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its
transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to
produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to
add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timing.
Figure 6-4. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit
86
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
6.7.3
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Device Clock Table
This section provides the timing requirements and switching characteristics for the various clock options
available on the 2802x MCUs. Table 6-5, Table 6-6, and Table 6-7 list the cycle times of various clocks.
Table 6-5. 2802x Clock Table and Nomenclature (40-MHz Devices)
MIN
SYSCLKOUT
LSPCLK (1)
ADC clock
(1)
(2)
tc(SCO), Cycle time
Frequency
tc(LCO), Cycle time
MAX
UNIT
500
ns
2
40
MHz
40
MHz
25
100 (2)
10 (2)
Frequency
tc(ADCCLK), Cycle time
NOM
25
ns
25
ns
Frequency
40
MHz
MAX
UNIT
Lower LSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.
This is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 40 MHz.
Table 6-6. 2802x Clock Table and Nomenclature (50-MHz Devices)
MIN
SYSCLKOUT
LSPCLK (1)
ADC clock
(1)
(2)
tc(SCO), Cycle time
Frequency
tc(LCO), Cycle time
20
500
ns
2
50
MHz
20
Frequency
tc(ADCCLK), Cycle time
NOM
80 (2)
12.5
(2)
ns
50
MHz
50
MHz
MAX
UNIT
500
ns
60
MHz
60
MHz
60
MHz
20
ns
Frequency
Lower LSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.
This is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 50 MHz.
Table 6-7. 2802x Clock Table and Nomenclature (60-MHz Devices)
MIN
SYSCLKOUT
LSPCLK (1)
ADC clock
(1)
(2)
tc(SCO), Cycle time
Frequency
tc(LCO), Cycle time
2
16.67
Frequency
66.67 (2)
15 (2)
Frequency
tc(ADCCLK), Cycle time
NOM
16.67
ns
16.67
ns
Lower LSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.
This is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 60 MHz.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
87
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-8. Device Clocking Requirements/Characteristics
MIN
On-chip oscillator (X1/X2 pins)
(Crystal/Resonator)
tc(OSC), Cycle time
External oscillator/clock source
(XCLKIN pin) — PLL Enabled
tc(CI), Cycle time (C8)
External oscillator/clock source
(XCLKIN pin) — PLL Disabled
tc(CI), Cycle time (C8)
Limp mode SYSCLKOUT
(with /2 enabled)
Frequency
MAX
UNIT
200
ns
5
20
MHz
33.3
200
ns
MHz
5
30
33.33
250
ns
4
30
MHz
Frequency range
Frequency
PLL lock time (1)
88
Frequency
tc(XCO), Cycle time (C1)
XCLKOUT
(1)
Frequency
NOM
50
1 to 5
MHz
66.67
2000
0.5
15
MHz
1
ms
tp
ns
The PLLLOCKPRD register must be updated based on the number of OSCCLK cycles. If the zero-pin internal oscillators (10 MHz) are
used as the clock source, then the PLLLOCKPRD register must be written with a value of 10,000 (minimum).
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 6-9. Internal Zero-Pin Oscillator (INTOSC1/INTOSC2) Characteristics
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Internal zero-pin oscillator 1 (INTOSC1) (1) (2)
Frequency
10
MHz
Internal zero-pin oscillator 2 (INTOSC2) (1) (2)
Frequency
10
MHz
55
kHz
Step size (coarse trim)
Step size (fine trim)
14
Temperature drift (3)
3.03
4.85 kHz/°C
Voltage (VDD) drift (3)
175
Hz/mV
(1)
(2)
(3)
kHz
In order to achieve better oscillator accuracy (10 MHz ± 1% or better) than shown, refer to the oscillator calibration example in
2802x C/C++ Header Files and Peripheral Examples (literature number SPRC832). Refer to Figure 6-5 for MIN/MAX values.
Frequency range ensured only when VREG is enabled, VREGENZ = VSS.
Output frequency of the internal oscillators follows the direction of both the temperature gradient and voltage (VDD) gradient. For
example:
• Increase in temperature will cause the output frequency to increase per the temperature coefficient.
• Decrease in voltage (VDD) will cause the output frequency to decrease per the voltage coefficient.
Zero-Pin Oscillator Frequency Movement With Temperature
10.6
10.5
Output Frequency (MHz)
10.4
10.3
10.2
10.1
10
9.9
9.8
9.7
9.6
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
Typical
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
Temperature (°C)
Max
Figure 6-5. Zero-Pin Oscillator Frequency Movement With Temperature
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
89
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.8
www.ti.com
Clock Requirements and Characteristics
Table 6-10. XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Enabled
NO.
MIN
MAX
UNIT
C9
tf(CI)
Fall time, XCLKIN
6
ns
C10
tr(CI)
Rise time, XCLKIN
6
ns
C11
tw(CIL)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
55
%
C12
tw(CIH)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
55
%
MIN
MAX
Table 6-11. XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Disabled
NO.
C9
tf(CI)
Fall time, XCLKIN
C10
tr(CI)
Rise time, XCLKIN
Up to 20 MHz
6
20 MHz to 30 MHz
2
Up to 20 MHz
6
20 MHz to 30 MHz
2
UNIT
ns
ns
C11
tw(CIL)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
55
%
C12
tw(CIH)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
55
%
The possible configuration modes are shown in Table 3-19.
Table 6-12. XCLKOUT Switching Characteristics (PLL Bypassed or Enabled) (1)
NO.
(1)
(2)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
(2)
MAX
UNIT
C3
tf(XCO)
Fall time, XCLKOUT
11
ns
C4
tr(XCO)
Rise time, XCLKOUT
11
ns
C5
tw(XCOL)
Pulse duration, XCLKOUT low
H–2
H+2
ns
C6
tw(XCOH)
Pulse duration, XCLKOUT high
H–2
H+2
ns
A load of 40 pF is assumed for these parameters.
H = 0.5tc(XCO)
C10
C9
C8
XCLKIN(A)
C1
C6
C3
C4
C5
XCLKOUT(B)
A.
B.
The relationship of XCLKIN to XCLKOUT depends on the divide factor chosen. The waveform relationship shown is
intended to illustrate the timing parameters only and may differ based on actual configuration.
XCLKOUT configured to reflect SYSCLKOUT.
Figure 6-6. Clock Timing
90
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
6.9
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Power Sequencing
There is no power sequencing requirement needed to ensure the device is in the proper state after reset
or to prevent the I/Os from glitching during power up/down. However, it is recommended that no voltage
larger than a diode drop (0.7 V) should be applied to any pin prior to powering up the device. Voltages
applied to pins on an unpowered device can bias internal p-n junctions in unintended ways and produce
unpredictable results.
VDDIO, VDDA
(3.3 V)
VDD (1.8 V)
INTOSC1
tINTOSCST
X1/X2
tOSCST
(B)
(A)
XCLKOUT
User-code dependent
tw(RSL1)
XRS
(D)
Address/data valid, internal boot-ROM code execution phase
Address/Data/
Control
(Internal)
td(EX)
th(boot-mode)(C)
Boot-Mode
Pins
User-code execution phase
User-code dependent
GPIO pins as input
Peripheral/GPIO function
Based on boot code
Boot-ROM execution starts
I/O Pins
GPIO pins as input (state depends on internal PU/PD)
User-code dependent
A.
B.
C.
D.
Upon power up, SYSCLKOUT is OSCCLK/4. Since the XCLKOUTDIV bits in the XCLK register come up with a reset
state of 0, SYSCLKOUT is further divided by 4 before it appears at XCLKOUT. XCLKOUT = OSCCLK/16 during this
phase.
Boot ROM configures the DIVSEL bits for /1 operation. XCLKOUT = OSCCLK/4 during this phase. Note that
XCLKOUT will not be visible at the pin until explicitly configured by user code.
After reset, the boot ROM code samples Boot Mode pins. Based on the status of the Boot Mode pin, the boot code
branches to destination memory or boot code function. If boot ROM code executes after power-on conditions (in
debugger environment), the boot code execution time is based on the current SYSCLKOUT speed. The SYSCLKOUT
will be based on user environment and could be with or without PLL enabled.
Using the XRS pin is optional due to the on-chip power-on reset (POR) circuitry.
Figure 6-7. Power-on Reset
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
91
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-13. Reset (XRS) Timing Requirements
MIN
th(boot-mode)
Hold time for boot-mode pins
tw(RSL2)
Pulse duration, XRS low on warm reset
NOM
MAX
UNIT
1000tc(SCO)
cycles
32tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
Table 6-14. Reset (XRS) Switching Characteristics
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
tw(RSL1)
Pulse duration, XRS driven by device
tw(WDRS)
Pulse duration, reset pulse generated by
watchdog
td(EX)
Delay time, address/data valid after XRS high
tINTOSCST
Start up time, internal zero-pin oscillator
tOSCST
(1)
(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
600
On-chip crystal-oscillator start-up time
ms
512tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
32tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
1
3
ms
10
ms
Dependent on crystal/resonator and board design.
INTOSC1
X1/X2
XCLKOUT
User-Code Dependent
tw(RSL2)
XRS
Address/Data/
Control
(Internal)
td(EX)
User-Code Execution
Boot-ROM Execution Starts
Boot-Mode
Pins
User-Code Execution Phase
Peripheral/GPIO Function
GPIO Pins as Input
th(boot-mode)(A)
Peripheral/GPIO Function
User-Code Execution Starts
I/O Pins
User-Code Dependent
GPIO Pins as Input (State Depends on Internal PU/PD)
User-Code Dependent
A.
After reset, the Boot ROM code samples BOOT Mode pins. Based on the status of the Boot Mode pin, the boot code
branches to destination memory or boot code function. If Boot ROM code executes after power-on conditions (in
debugger environment), the Boot code execution time is based on the current SYSCLKOUT speed. The
SYSCLKOUT will be based on user environment and could be with or without PLL enabled.
Figure 6-8. Warm Reset
92
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Figure 6-9 shows an example for the effect of writing into PLLCR register. In the first phase, PLLCR =
0x0004 and SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK x 2. The PLLCR is then written with 0x0008. Right after the PLLCR
register is written, the PLL lock-up phase begins. During this phase, SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK/2. After the
PLL lock-up is complete, SYSCLKOUT reflects the new operating frequency, OSCCLK x 4.
OSCCLK
Write to PLLCR
SYSCLKOUT
OSCCLK * 2
OSCCLK * 4
OSCCLK/2
(CPU frequency while PLL is stabilizing
with the desired frequency. This period
(PLL lock-up time tp) is 1 ms long.)
(Current CPU
Frequency)
(Changed CPU frequency)
Figure 6-9. Example of Effect of Writing Into PLLCR Register
6.10 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
6.10.1
GPIO - Output Timing
Table 6-15. General-Purpose Output Switching Characteristics
MAX
UNIT
tr(GPO)
Rise time, GPIO switching low to high
PARAMETER
All GPIOs
13 (1)
ns
tf(GPO)
Fall time, GPIO switching high to low
All GPIOs
13 (1)
ns
tfGPO
Toggling frequency
(1)
MIN
15
MHz
Rise time and fall time vary with electrical loading on I/O pins. Values given in Table 6-15 are applicable for a 40-pF load on I/O pins.
GPIO
tf(GPO)
tr(GPO)
Figure 6-10. General-Purpose Output Timing
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
93
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.10.2
www.ti.com
GPIO - Input Timing
(A)
GPIO Signal
GPxQSELn = 1,0 (6 samples)
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
tw(SP)
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
[(SYSCLKOUT cycle * 2 * QUALPRD) * 5
Sampling Window
1
1
1
Sampling Period determined
by GPxCTRL[QUALPRD]
tw(IQSW)
1
(B)
(C)
]
SYSCLKOUT
QUALPRD = 1
(SYSCLKOUT/2)
(D)
Output From
Qualifier
A.
B.
C.
D.
This glitch will be ignored by the input qualifier. The QUALPRD bit field specifies the qualification sampling period. It
can vary from 00 to 0xFF. If QUALPRD = 00, then the sampling period is 1 SYSCLKOUT cycle. For any other value
"n", the qualification sampling period in 2n SYSCLKOUT cycles (i.e., at every 2n SYSCLKOUT cycles, the GPIO pin
will be sampled).
The qualification period selected via the GPxCTRL register applies to groups of 8 GPIO pins.
The qualification block can take either three or six samples. The GPxQSELn Register selects which sample mode is
used.
In the example shown, for the qualifier to detect the change, the input should be stable for 10 SYSCLKOUT cycles or
greater. In other words, the inputs should be stable for (5 x QUALPRD x 2) SYSCLKOUT cycles. This would ensure
5 sampling periods for detection to occur. Since external signals are driven asynchronously, an 13-SYSCLKOUT-wide
pulse ensures reliable recognition.
Figure 6-11. Sampling Mode
Table 6-16. General-Purpose Input Timing Requirements
MIN
tw(SP)
Sampling period
tw(IQSW)
Input qualifier sampling window
tw(GPI)
(1)
(2)
94
(2)
Pulse duration, GPIO low/high
MAX
UNIT
QUALPRD = 0
1tc(SCO)
cycles
QUALPRD ≠ 0
2tc(SCO) * QUALPRD
cycles
tw(SP) * (n (1) – 1)
cycles
2tc(SCO)
cycles
tw(IQSW) + tw(SP) + 1tc(SCO)
cycles
Synchronous mode
With input qualifier
"n" represents the number of qualification samples as defined by GPxQSELn register.
For tw(GPI), pulse width is measured from VIL to VIL for an active low signal and VIH to VIH for an active high signal.
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.10.3 Sampling Window Width for Input Signals
The following section summarizes the sampling window width for input signals for various input qualifier
configurations.
Sampling frequency denotes how often a signal is sampled with respect to SYSCLKOUT.
Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT/(2 * QUALPRD), if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT, if QUALPRD = 0
Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
In the above equations, SYSCLKOUT cycle indicates the time period of SYSCLKOUT.
Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle, if QUALPRD = 0
In a given sampling window, either 3 or 6 samples of the input signal are taken to determine the validity of
the signal. This is determined by the value written to GPxQSELn register.
Case 1:
Qualification using 3 samples
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 2, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 2, if QUALPRD = 0
Case 2:
Qualification using 6 samples
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 5, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 5, if QUALPRD = 0
XCLKOUT
GPIOxn
tw(GPI)
Figure 6-12. General-Purpose Input Timing
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
95
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.10.4 Low-Power Mode Wakeup Timing
Table 6-17 shows the timing requirements, Table 6-18 shows the switching characteristics, and
Figure 6-13 shows the timing diagram for IDLE mode.
Table 6-17. IDLE Mode Timing Requirements (1)
MIN
tw(WAKE-INT)
(1)
Pulse duration, external wake-up signal
Without input qualifier
NOM
MAX
2tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
UNIT
cycles
5tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
Table 6-18. IDLE Mode Switching Characteristics (1)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
Delay time, external wake signal to program execution resume
•
td(WAKE-IDLE)
•
•
MIN
Wake-up from Flash
– Flash module in active state
Without input qualifier
MAX
Wake-up from Flash
– Flash module in sleep state
Without input qualifier
Wake-up from SARAM
Without input qualifier
UNIT
cycles
20tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
cycles
20tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
1050tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
cycles
1050tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
20tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
(1)
(2)
TYP
(2)
cycles
20tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
This is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR (triggered
by the wake-up) signal involves additional latency.
td(WAKE−IDLE)
Address/Data
(internal)
XCLKOUT
tw(WAKE−INT)
WAKE INT
A.
B.
(A)(B)
WAKE INT can be any enabled interrupt, WDINT or XRS.
From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-13. IDLE Entry and Exit Timing
96
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 6-19. STANDBY Mode Timing Requirements
tw(WAKE-INT)
(1)
Pulse duration, external
wake-up signal
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
Without input qualification
3tc(OSCCLK)
With input qualification (1)
NOM
MAX
UNIT
cycles
(2 + QUALSTDBY) * tc(OSCCLK)
QUALSTDBY is a 6-bit field in the LPMCR0 register.
Table 6-20. STANDBY Mode Switching Characteristics
PARAMETER
td(IDLE-XCOL)
TEST CONDITIONS
Delay time, IDLE instruction
executed to XCLKOUT low
MIN
32tc(SCO)
TYP
MAX
UNIT
45tc(SCO)
cycles
Delay time, external wake signal to program execution
resume (1)
•
td(WAKE-STBY)
•
Wake up from flash
– Flash module in active
state
Without input qualifier
Wake up from flash
– Flash module in sleep
state
Without input qualifier
With input qualifier
With input qualifier
Without input qualifier
•
(1)
Wake up from SARAM
With input qualifier
cycles
100tc(SCO)
100tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
cycles
1125tc(SCO)
1125tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
100tc(SCO)
100tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
cycles
cycles
This is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR (triggered
by the wake up signal) involves additional latency.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
97
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
(C)
(A)
(B)
Device
Status
(F)
(D)(E)
STANDBY
(G)
STANDBY
Normal Execution
Flushing Pipeline
Wake-up
(H)
Signal
tw(WAKE-INT)
td(WAKE-STBY)
X1/X2 or
XCLKIN
XCLKOUT
td(IDLE−XCOL)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into STANDBY mode.
The PLL block responds to the STANDBY signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for the number of cycles indicated below
before being turned off:
•
16 cycles, when DIVSEL = 00 or 01
•
32 cycles, when DIVSEL = 10
•
64 cycles, when DIVSEL = 11
This delay enables the CPU pipeline and any other pending operations to flush properly.
Clock to the peripherals are turned off. However, the PLL and watchdog are not shut down. The device is now in
STANDBY mode.
The external wake-up signal is driven active.
The wake-up signal fed to a GPIO pin to wake up the device must meet the minimum pulse width requirement.
Furthermore, this signal must be free of glitches. If a noisy signal is fed to a GPIO pin, the wake-up behavior of the
device will not be deterministic and the device may not exit low-power mode for subsequent wake-up pulses.
After a latency period, the STANDBY mode is exited.
Normal execution resumes. The device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled).
From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-14. STANDBY Entry and Exit Timing Diagram
Table 6-21. HALT Mode Timing Requirements
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
tw(WAKE-GPIO)
Pulse duration, GPIO wake-up signal
toscst + 2tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
tw(WAKE-XRS)
Pulse duration, XRS wakeup signal
toscst + 8tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
Table 6-22. HALT Mode Switching Characteristics
PARAMETER
td(IDLE-XCOL)
Delay time, IDLE instruction executed to XCLKOUT low
tp
PLL lock-up time
td(WAKE-HALT)
Delay time, PLL lock to program execution resume
•
Wake up from flash
– Flash module in sleep state
•
98
Wake up from SARAM
Electrical Specifications
MIN
32tc(SCO)
TYP
MAX
UNIT
45tc(SCO)
cycles
1
ms
1125tc(SCO)
cycles
35tc(SCO)
cycles
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
(C)
(A)
(F)
(B)
Device
Status
HALT
Flushing Pipeline
(H)
(G)
(D)(E)
HALT
PLL Lock-up Time
Wake-up Latency
Normal
Execution
(I)
GPIOn
td(WAKE−HALT )
tw(WAKE-GPIO)
tp
X1/X2 or
XCLKIN
Oscillator Start-up Time
XCLKOUT
td(IDLE−XCOL)
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into HALT mode.
The PLL block responds to the HALT signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for the number of cycles indicated below before
oscillator is turned off and the CLKIN to the core is stopped:
•
16 cycles, when DIVSEL = 00 or 01
•
32 cycles, when DIVSEL = 10
•
64 cycles, when DIVSEL = 11
This delay enables the CPU pipeline and any other pending operations to flush properly.
Clocks to the peripherals are turned off and the PLL is shut down. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as
the clock source, the internal oscillator is shut down as well. The device is now in HALT mode and consumes
absolute minimum power. It is possible to keep the zero-pin internal oscillators (INTOSC1 and INTOSC2) and the
watchdog alive in HALT mode. This is done by writing to the appropriate bits in the CLKCTL register.
When the GPIOn pin (used to bring the device out of HALT) is driven low, the oscillator is turned on and the oscillator
wake-up sequence is initiated. The GPIO pin should be driven high only after the oscillator has stabilized. This
enables the provision of a clean clock signal during the PLL lock sequence. Since the falling edge of the GPIO pin
asynchronously begins the wakeup procedure, care should be taken to maintain a low noise environment prior to
entering and during HALT mode.
The wake-up signal fed to a GPIO pin to wake up the device must meet the minimum pulse width requirement.
Furthermore, this signal must be free of glitches. If a noisy signal is fed to a GPIO pin, the wake-up behavior of the
device will not be deterministic and the device may not exit low-power mode for subsequent wake-up pulses.
Once the oscillator has stabilized, the PLL lock sequence is initiated, which takes 1 ms.
When CLKIN to the core is enabled, the device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled), after a latency. The HALT
mode is now exited.
Normal operation resumes.
From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-15. HALT Wake-Up Using GPIOn
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
99
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.11 Enhanced Control Peripherals
6.11.1 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) Timing
PWM refers to PWM outputs on ePWM1–4 . Table 6-23 shows the PWM timing requirements and
Table 6-24, switching characteristics.
Table 6-23. ePWM Timing Requirements (1)
TEST CONDITIONS
tw(SYCIN)
Sync input pulse width
MIN
Asynchronous
(1)
UNIT
cycles
2tc(SCO)
cycles
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
Synchronous
With input qualifier
MAX
2tc(SCO)
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
Table 6-24. ePWM Switching Characteristics
PARAMETER
tw(PWM)
Pulse duration, PWMx output high/low
tw(SYNCOUT)
Sync output pulse width
td(PWM)tza
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced high
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced low
td(TZ-PWM)HZ
Delay time, trip input active to PWM Hi-Z
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
MAX
33.33
UNIT
ns
8tc(SCO)
cycles
no pin load
25
ns
20
ns
6.11.2 Trip-Zone Input Timing
XCLKOUT(A)
tw(TZ)
TZ
td(TZ-PWM)HZ
PWM(B)
A.
B.
TZ - TZ1, TZ2, TZ3
PWM refers to all the PWM pins in the device. The state of the PWM pins after TZ is taken high depends on the PWM
recovery software.
Figure 6-16. PWM Hi-Z Characteristics
Table 6-25. Trip-Zone Input Timing Requirements (1)
MIN
tw(TZ)
Pulse duration, TZx input low
Asynchronous
Synchronous
With input qualifier
(1)
100
MAX
UNIT
1tc(SCO)
cycles
2tc(SCO)
cycles
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 6-26 shows the high-resolution PWM switching characteristics.
Table 6-26. High-Resolution PWM Characteristics at SYSCLKOUT = 50 MHz (1)–60 MHz
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
150
310
ps
Micro Edge Positioning (MEP) step size (2)
(1)
(2)
The HRPWM operates at a minimum SYSCLKOUT frequency of 50 MHz. Below 50 MHz, with device process variation, the MEP step
size may decrease under cold temperature and high core voltage conditions to such a point that 255 MEP steps will not span an entire
SYSCLKOUT cycle.
Maximum MEP step size is based on worst-case process, maximum temperature and maximum voltage. MEP step size will increase
with low voltage and high temperature and decrease with voltage and cold temperature.
Applications that use the HRPWM feature should use MEP Scale Factor Optimizer (SFO) estimation software functions. See the TI
software libraries for details of using SFO function in end applications. SFO functions help to estimate the number of MEP steps per
SYSCLKOUT period dynamically while the HRPWM is in operation.
6.11.3 Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Timing
Table 6-27 shows the eCAP timing requirement and Table 6-28 shows the eCAP switching characteristics.
Table 6-27. Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Timing Requirement (1)
TEST CONDITIONS
tw(CAP)
Capture input pulse width
MAX
UNIT
2tc(SCO)
cycles
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
With input qualifier
(1)
MIN
Asynchronous
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
Table 6-28. eCAP Switching Characteristics
PARAMETER
tw(APWM)
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
Pulse duration, APWMx output high/low
MAX
UNIT
20
ns
6.11.4 ADC Start-of-Conversion Timing
Table 6-29. External ADC Start-of-Conversion Switching Characteristics
PARAMETER
tw(ADCSOCL)
MIN
Pulse duration, ADCSOCxO low
32tc(HCO )
MAX
UNIT
cycles
tw(ADCSOCL)
ADCSOCAO
or
ADCSOCBO
Figure 6-17. ADCSOCAO or ADCSOCBO Timing
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
101
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.5 External Interrupt Timing
tw(INT)
XINT1, XINT2, XINT3
td(INT)
Address bus
(internal)
Interrupt Vector
Figure 6-18. External Interrupt Timing
Table 6-30. External Interrupt Timing Requirements (1)
TEST CONDITIONS
tw(INT)
(1)
(2)
(2)
Pulse duration, INT input low/high
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Synchronous
1tc(SCO)
cycles
With qualifier
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
This timing is applicable to any GPIO pin configured for ADCSOC functionality.
Table 6-31. External Interrupt Switching Characteristics (1)
PARAMETER
td(INT)
(1)
102
Delay time, INT low/high to interrupt-vector fetch
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tw(IQSW) + 12tc(SCO)
cycles
For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-16.
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.11.6 I2C Electrical Specification and Timing
Table 6-32. I2C Timing
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
MAX
UNIT
400
kHz
fSCL
SCL clock frequency
vil
Low level input voltage
Vih
High level input voltage
Vhys
Input hysteresis
Vol
Low level output voltage
3 mA sink current
tLOW
Low period of SCL clock
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
1.3
ms
tHIGH
High period of SCL clock
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
0.6
ms
lI
Input current with an input voltage
between 0.1 VDDIO and 0.9 VDDIO MAX
0.3 VDDIO
V
0.7 VDDIO
V
0.05 VDDIO
V
0
–10
0.4
10
V
mA
6.11.7 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Master Mode Timing
Table 6-33 lists the master mode timing (clock phase = 0) and Table 6-34 lists the timing (clock
phase = 1). Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20 show the timing waveforms.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
103
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-33. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN OR
SPIBRR = 0 OR 2
NO.
MIN
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD
AND SPIBRR > 3
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(SPC)M
Cycle time, SPICLK
4tc(LCO)
128tc(LCO)
5tc(LCO)
127tc(LCO)
ns
2
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
ns
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
td(SPCH-SIMO)M
Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISIMO
valid (clock polarity = 0)
10
10
td(SPCL-SIMO)M
Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISIMO
valid (clock polarity = 1)
10
10
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK
low (clock polarity = 0)
35
35
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK
high (clock polarity = 1)
35
35
tv(SPCL-SOMI)M
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
tv(SPCH-SOMI)M
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
3
4
5
8
9
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
104
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR +1)
tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the clock polarity bit (SPICCR.6).
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
1
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
2
3
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
4
5
SPISIMO
Master Out Data Is Valid
8
9
SPISOMI
Master In Data
Must Be Valid
(A)
SPISTE
A.
In the master mode, SPISTE goes active 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before valid SPI clock edge. On the trailing
end of the word, the SPISTE will go inactive 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit,
except that SPISTE stays active between back-to-back transmit words in both FIFO and non-FIFO modes.
Figure 6-19. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
105
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-34. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN
OR SPIBRR = 0 OR 2
NO.
MIN
MAX
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD
AND SPIBRR > 3
MIN
UNIT
MAX
1
tc(SPC)M
Cycle time, SPICLK
4tc(LCO)
128tc(LCO)
5tc(LCO)
127tc(LCO)
ns
2
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc (LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
ns
tw(SPCL))M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc (LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)M
Setup time, SPISIMO data valid
before SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)M
Setup time, SPISIMO data valid
before SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M
Setup time, SPISOMI before
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
35
35
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M
Setup time, SPISOMI before
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
35
35
tv(SPCH-SOMI)M
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
tv(SPCL-SOMI)M
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
3
6
7
10
11
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
106
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
The MASTER/SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is set.
tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
1
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
2
3
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
6
7
Master out data Is valid
SPISIMO
Data Valid
10
11
Master in data
must be valid
SPISOMI
SPISTE(A)
B.
In the master mode, SPISTE goes active 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before valid SPI clock edge. On the trailing
end of the word, the SPISTE will go inactive 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit,
except that SPISTE stays active between back-to-back transmit words in both FIFO and non-FIFO modes.
Figure 6-20. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
107
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.8 SPI Slave Mode Timing
Table 6-35 lists the slave mode external timing (clock phase = 0) and Table 6-36 (clock phase = 1).
Figure 6-21 and Figure 6-22 show the timing waveforms.
Table 6-35. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
NO.
MIN
MAX
12
tc(SPC)S
Cycle time, SPICLK
13
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
td(SPCH-SOMI)S
Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 0)
35
td(SPCL-SOMI)S
Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 1)
35
tv(SPCL-SOMI)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.75tc(SPC)S
tv(SPCH-SOMI)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.75tc(SPC)S
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
35
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
35
tv(SPCL-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
tv(SPCH-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
14
15
16
19
20
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
4tc(LCO)
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
12
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
13
14
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
15
16
SPISOMI
SPISOMI data Is valid
19
20
SPISIMO
SPISIMO data
must be valid
SPISTE(A)
C.
In the slave mode, the SPISTE signal should be asserted low at least 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before the valid SPI clock
edge and remain low for at least 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit.
Figure 6-21. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
108
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Table 6-36. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1) (1) (2) (3) (4)
NO.
MIN
MAX
12
tc(SPC)S
Cycle time, SPICLK
13
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC) S
tw(SPCL)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC) S
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)S
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.125tc(SPC)S
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)S
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.125tc(SPC)S
tv(SPCL-SOMI)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.75tc(SPC)S
tv(SPCH-SOMI)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.75tc(SPC) S
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
35
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
35
tv(SPCH-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
tv(SPCL-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
14
17
18
21
22
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
8tc(LCO)
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
12
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
13
14
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
17
18
SPISOMI
SPISOMI data is valid
Data Valid
21
22
SPISIMO
SPISIMO data
must be valid
SPISTE(A)
A.
In the slave mode, the SPISTE signal should be asserted low at least 0.5tc(SPC) before the valid SPI clock edge and
remain low for at least 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit.
Figure 6-22. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
109
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.9 On-Chip Comparator/DAC
Table 6-37. Electrical Characteristics of the Comparator/DAC
CHARACTERISTIC
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Comparator
Comparator Input Range
VSSA – VDDA
V
Comparator response time to PWM Trip Zone (Async)
30
ns
Input Offset
±5
mV
35
mV
Input Hysteresis
(1)
DAC
DAC Output Range
VSSA – VDDA
DAC resolution
10
DAC settling time
bits
See
Figure 6-23
DAC Gain
DAC Offset
Monotonic
–1.5
%
10
mV
Yes
INL
(1)
V
±3
LSB
Hysteresis on the comparator inputs is achieved with a Schmidt trigger configuration. This results in an effective 100-kΩ feedback
resistance between the output of the comparator and the non-inverting input of the comparator. There is an option to disable the
hysteresis and, with it, the feedback resistance; see the TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and
Comparator Reference Guide (literature number SPRUGE5) for more information on this option if needed in your system.
1100
1000
900
800
Settling Time (ns)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
DAC Step Size (Codes)
DAC Accuracy
15 Codes
7 Codes
3 Codes
1 Code
Figure 6-23. DAC Settling Time
110
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.11.10 On-Chip Analog-to-Digital Converter
Table 6-38. ADC Electrical Characteristics
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
DC SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
12
Bits
ADC clock
60-MHz device
0.001
60
MHz
Sample Window
28027/26/23/22
7
64
14
64
ADC
Clocks
28021/20/200
ACCURACY
INL (Integral nonlinearity) (1)
60-MHz clock
(4.62 MSPS)
±2
DNL (Differential nonlinearity)
Offset error
(2)
LSB
±1
Executing Device_Cal
function
Executing periodic
self-recalibration (3)
LSB
–20
0
20
–4
0
4
LSB
Overall gain error with internal reference
–60
60
LSB
Overall gain error with external reference
–40
40
LSB
Channel-to-channel offset variation
–4
4
LSB
Channel-to-channel gain variation
–4
4
LSB
ADC temperature coefficient with internal reference
–50
ppm/°C
ADC temperature coefficient with external reference
–20
ppm/°C
ANALOG INPUT
Analog input voltage with internal reference
0
3.3
V
Analog input voltage with external reference
VREFLO
VREFHI
V
VSSA
VSSA
V
1.98
VDDA
V
VREFLO input voltage (4)
VREFHI input voltage (5)
Input capacitance
Input leakage current
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
with VREFLO = VSSA
5
pF
±5
mA
INL will degrade when the ADC input voltage goes above VDDA.
1 LSB has the weighted value of full-scale range (FSR)/4096. FSR is 3.3 V with internal reference and VREFHI - VREFLO for external
reference.
Periodic self-recalibration will remove system-level and temperature dependencies on the ADC zero offset error. This can be performed
as needed in the application without sacrificing an ADC channel by using the procedure listed in the "ADC Zero Offset Calibration"
section of the TMS320x2802x, 2803x Piccolo Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Comparator Reference Guide (literature number
SPRUGE5).
VREFLO is always connected to VSSA.
VREFHI must not exceed VDDA when using either internal or external reference modes. Since VREFHI is tied to ADCINA0, the input signal
on ADCINA0 must not exceed VDDA.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
111
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-39. ADC Power Modes
IDDA
UNITS
Mode A – Operating Mode
ADC OPERATING MODE
ADC Clock Enabled
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 1)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWRDN = 1)
CONDITIONS
13
mA
Mode B – Quick Wake Mode
ADC Clock Enabled
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 1)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWRDN = 0)
4
mA
Mode C – Comparator-Only Mode
ADC Clock Enabled
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 0)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWRDN = 0)
1.5
mA
Mode D – Off Mode
ADC Clock Enabled
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 0)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 0)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWRDN = 0)
0.075
mA
6.11.10.1 Internal Temperature Sensor
Table 6-40. Temperature Sensor Coefficient
PARAMETER (1)
MIN
TSLOPE
Degrees C of temperature movement per measured ADC LSB change
of the temperature sensor
TOFFSET
ADC output at 0°C of the temperature sensor
(1)
(2)
(3)
TYP
MAX
0.18 (2) (3)
UNIT
°C/LSB
1750
LSB
The temperature sensor slope and offset are given in terms of ADC LSBs using the internal reference of the ADC. Values must be
adjusted accordingly in external reference mode to the external reference voltage.
ADC temperature coeffieicient is accounted for in this specification
Output of the temperature sensor (in terms of LSBs) is sign-consistent with the direction of the temperature movement. Increasing
temperatures will give increasing ADC values relative to an initial value; decreasing temperatures will give decreasing ADC values
relative to an initial value.
6.11.10.2 ADC Power-Up Control Bit Timing
Table 6-41. ADC Power-Up Delays
PARAMETER (1)
td(PWD)
(1)
MIN
TYP
MAX
Delay time for the ADC to be stable after power up
1
UNIT
ms
Timings maintain compatibility to the ADC module. The 2802x ADC supports driving all 3 bits at the same time td(PWD) ms before first
conversion.
ADCPWDN/
ADCBGPWD/
ADCREFPWD/
ADCENABLE
td(PWD)
Request for ADC
Conversion
Figure 6-24. ADC Conversion Timing
112
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
ADCIN
Rs
Source
Signal
Ron
3.4 kW
Switch
Cp
5 pF
ac
Ch
1.6 pF
28x DSP
Typical Values of the Input Circuit Components:
Switch Resistance (Ron): 3.4 k W
Sampling Capacitor (Ch): 1.6 pF
Parasitic Capacitance (Cp): 5 pF
Source Resistance (Rs): 50 W
Figure 6-25. ADC Input Impedance Model
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
113
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.11.10.3 ADC Sequential and Simultaneous Timings
Analog Input
SOC0 Sample
Window
0
2
SOC1 Sample
Window
9
15
SOC2 Sample
Window
22
24
37
ADCCLK
ADCCTL 1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
SOC0
ADCRESULT 0
SOC1
2 ADCCLKs
SOC2
Result 0 Latched
ADCRESULT 1
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
ADCINTFLG .ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0
13 ADC Clocks
6
ADCCLKs
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
1 ADCCLK
Conversion 1
13 ADC Clocks
Figure 6-26. Timing Example for Sequential Mode / Late Interrupt Pulse
114
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Analog Input
SOC0 Sample
Window
0
2
SOC1 Sample
Window
9
15
SOC2 Sample
Window
22
24
37
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
SOC0
SOC1
SOC2
Result 0 Latched
ADCRESULT 0
ADCRESULT 1
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG .ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0
13 ADC Clocks
6
ADCCLKs
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
2 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1
13 ADC Clocks
Figure 6-27. Timing Example for Sequential Mode / Early Interrupt Pulse
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
115
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Analog Input A
SOC0 Sample
A Window
SOC2 Sample
A Window
SOC0 Sample
B Window
SOC2 Sample
B Window
Analog Input B
0
2
9
22
24
37
50
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
SOC0 (A/B)
ADCRESULT 0
SOC2 (A/B)
2 ADCCLKs
Result 0 (A) Latched
ADCRESULT 1
Result 0 (B) Latched
ADCRESULT 2
EOC0 Pulse
1 ADCCLK
EOC1 Pulse
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG .ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
19
ADCCLKs
Conversion 0 (B)
13 ADC Clocks
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
2 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
Figure 6-28. Timing Example for Simultaneous Mode / Late Interrupt Pulse
116
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
Analog Input A
SOC0 Sample
A Window
SOC2 Sample
A Window
Analog Input B
SOC0 Sample
B Window
0
2
SOC2 Sample
B Window
9
22
24
37
50
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
SOC0 (A/B)
SOC2 (A/B)
2 ADCCLKs
ADCRESULT 0
Result 0 (A) Latched
ADCRESULT 1
Result 0 (B) Latched
ADCRESULT 2
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG .ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
19
ADCCLKs
Conversion 0 (B)
13 ADC Clocks
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
2 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
Figure 6-29. Timing Example for Simultaneous Mode / Early Interrupt Pulse
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
117
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
6.12 Detailed Descriptions
Integral Nonlinearity
Integral nonlinearity refers to the deviation of each individual code from a line drawn from zero through full
scale. The point used as zero occurs one-half LSB before the first code transition. The full-scale point is
defined as level one-half LSB beyond the last code transition. The deviation is measured from the center
of each particular code to the true straight line between these two points.
Differential Nonlinearity
An ideal ADC exhibits code transitions that are exactly 1 LSB apart. DNL is the deviation from this ideal
value. A differential nonlinearity error of less than ±1 LSB ensures no missing codes.
Zero Offset
The major carry transition should occur when the analog input is at zero volts. Zero error is defined as the
deviation of the actual transition from that point.
Gain Error
The first code transition should occur at an analog value one-half LSB above negative full scale. The last
transition should occur at an analog value one and one-half LSB below the nominal full scale. Gain error is
the deviation of the actual difference between first and last code transitions and the ideal difference
between first and last code transitions.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio + Distortion (SINAD)
SINAD is the ratio of the rms value of the measured input signal to the rms sum of all other spectral
components below the Nyquist frequency, including harmonics but excluding dc. The value for SINAD is
expressed in decibels.
Effective Number of Bits (ENOB)
For a sine wave, SINAD can be expressed in terms of the number of bits. Using the following formula,
(SINAD - 1.76)
N=
6.02
it is possible to get a measure of performance expressed as N, the effective number of
bits. Thus, effective number of bits for a device for sine wave inputs at a given input frequency can be
calculated directly from its measured SINAD.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
THD is the ratio of the rms sum of the first nine harmonic components to the rms value of the measured
input signal and is expressed as a percentage or in decibels.
Spurious Free Dynamic Range (SFDR)
SFDR is the difference in dB between the rms amplitude of the input signal and the peak spurious signal.
118
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
6.13 Flash Timing
Table 6-42. Flash/OTP Endurance for T Temperature Material (1)
ERASE/PROGRAM
TEMPERATURE
Nf
Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)
0°C to 105°C (ambient)
NOTP
OTP endurance for the array (write cycles)
0°C to 30°C (ambient)
(1)
MIN
TYP
20000
50000
MAX
UNIT
cycles
1
write
Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.
Table 6-43. Flash/OTP Endurance for S Temperature Material (1)
ERASE/PROGRAM
TEMPERATURE
Nf
NOTP
(1)
Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)
0°C to 125°C (ambient)
OTP endurance for the array (write cycles)
0°C to 30°C (ambient)
MIN
TYP
20000
50000
MAX
UNIT
cycles
1
write
Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.
Table 6-44. Flash/OTP Endurance for Q Temperature Material (1)
ERASE/PROGRAM
TEMPERATURE
Nf
Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)
–40°C to 125°C (ambient)
NOTP
OTP endurance for the array (write cycles)
–40°C to 30°C (ambient)
(1)
MIN
TYP
20000
50000
MAX
UNIT
cycles
1
write
Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.
Table 6-45. Flash Parameters at 60-MHz SYSCLKOUT
PARAMETER
IDDP
(1)
VDD current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP
(1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP
(1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
(1)
TEST
CONDITIONS
MIN
VREG
disabled
TYP
MAX
UNIT
80
mA
60
VREG enabled
120
mA
Typical parameters as seen at room temperature including function call overhead, with all peripherals off.
Table 6-46. Flash Parameters at 50-MHz SYSCLKOUT
PARAMETER
IDDP
(1)
VDD current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP (1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP (1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
(1)
TEST
CONDITIONS
MIN
VREG
disabled
TYP
MAX
UNIT
70
mA
60
VREG enabled
110
mA
Typical parameters as seen at room temperature including function call overhead, with all peripherals off.
Table 6-47. Flash Parameters at 40-MHz SYSCLKOUT
PARAMETER
IDDP (1)
VDD current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP (1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
IDDIOP (1)
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
(1)
TEST
CONDITIONS
MIN
VREG
disabled
VREG enabled
TYP
MAX
UNIT
60
mA
60
100
mA
Typical parameters as seen at room temperature including function call overhead, with all peripherals off.
Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
119
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
www.ti.com
Table 6-48. Flash Program/Erase Time
TEST
CONDITIONS
PARAMETER
Program Time
Erase Time
MIN
16-Bit Word
TYP
MAX
UNIT
50
ms
8K Sector
250
ms
4K Sector
125
ms
8K Sector
2
s
4K Sector
2
s
Table 6-49. Flash/OTP Access Timing
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
ta(fp)
Paged Flash access time
40
ns
ta(fr)
Random Flash access time
40
ns
ta(OTP)
OTP access time
60
ns
Table 6-50. Minimum Required Flash/OTP Wait-States at Different Frequencies
(1)
SYSCLKOUT
(MHz)
SYSCLKOUT
(ns)
PAGE
WAIT-STATE (1)
RANDOM
WAIT-STATE (1)
OTP
WAIT-STATE
60
16.67
2
2
3
55
18.18
2
2
3
50
20
1
1
2
45
22.22
1
1
2
40
25
1
1
2
35
28.57
1
1
2
30
33.33
1
1
1
Page and random wait-state must be ≥ 1.
The equations to compute the Flash page wait-state and random wait-state in Table 6-50 are as follows:
éæ t a(f ×p) ö ù
÷ - 1ú round up to the next highest integer, or 1, whichever is larger
Flash Page Wait State = êç
êëçè t c(SCO) ÷ø úû
éæ t a(f ×r) ö ù
÷ - 1ú round up to the next highest integer, or 1, whichever is larger
Flash Random Wait State = êç
ç
÷
ëêè t c(SCO) ø ûú
The equation to compute the OTP wait-state in Table 6-50 is as follows:
éæ t a(OTP) ö ù
÷ - 1ú round up to the next highest integer, or 1, whichever is larger
OTP Wait State = êç
êëçè t c(SCO) ÷ø úû
120
Electrical Specifications
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
7 Revision History
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS523E device-specific
data sheet to make it an SPRS523F revision.
Scope: See table below.
LOCATION
ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, AND MODIFICATIONS
Section 2
Changed section title from "Hardware Features" to "Introduction"
Table 2-1
Hardware Features:
•
12-Bit ADC:
– Added row for "Dual Sample-and-Hold"
Section 2.2
Signal Descriptions:
•
Added NOTE about using the on-chip VREG
Section 3.4
Register Map:
•
Changed "The devices contain four peripheral register spaces" to "The devices contain three peripheral
register spaces"
Table 3-16
Typical Specifications for External Quartz Crystal:
•
Changed CL1 for 15 MHz from 12 pF to 15 pF
•
Removed "CL (pF)" column
•
Added footnote about Cshunt
Section 4.1.1
ADC:
•
Section 4.1.1.1, Features:
– Updated Internal Reference list item and equations
– Updated External Reference list item and equations
Section 4.1.1
ADC:
•
"ADC Connections if the ADC is Not Used" section:
– Changed "ADCINAn, ADCINBn – Connect to VSSA" to "ADCINAn, ADCINBn, VREFHI – Connect to VSSA"
Section 5
Device Support:
•
Added "XDS560 emulator" under Hardware Development Tools
Section 5.3
Added "Community Resources" section
Section 6.3
Electrical Characteristics:
•
Removed "VDD BOR trip point" parameter
•
Removed "VDD over-voltage trip point" parameter
•
VREG VDD output:
– Removed MIN value of 1.865 V
– Removed MAX value of 1.955 V
•
Updated footnote
Table 6-9
Internal Zero-Pin Oscillator (INTOSC1/INTOSC2) Characteristics:
•
Internal zero-pin oscillator 1 (INTOSC1):
– Removed "tc(ZPOSC1), Cycle time" row
– Removed MIN Frequency of 9.7 MHz
– Removed MAX Frequency of 10.3 MHz
•
Internal zero-pin oscillator 2 (INTOSC2):
– Removed "tc(ZPOSC2), Cycle time" row
– Removed MIN Frequency of 9.7 MHz
– Removed MAX Frequency of 10.3 MHz
•
Temperature drift:
– Changed TYP value from 3 kHz/°C to 3.03 kHz/°C
– Added MAX value of 4.85 kHz/°C
•
Updated "In order to achieve better oscillator accuracy ..." footnote
Figure 6-5
Added "Zero-Pin Oscillator Frequency Movement With Temperature" graph
Figure 6-19
SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0):
•
Replaced drawing
Revision History
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
121
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
LOCATION
122
www.ti.com
ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, AND MODIFICATIONS
Table 6-37
Electrical Characteristics of the Comparator/DAC:
•
Input Hysteresis: Added reference to new footnote
•
DAC settling time: Replaced TYP value of 2 µs with reference to Figure 6-23
•
Added footnote
Figure 6-23
Added "DAC Settling Time" figure
Table 6-48
Flash Program/Erase Time:
•
Erase time (8K Sector): Changed TYP value from 10 s to 2 s
•
Erase time (4K Sector): Changed TYP value from 10 s to 2 s
Revision History
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
TMS320F28027, TMS320F28026, TMS320F28023, TMS320F28022
TMS320F28021, TMS320F28020, TMS320F280200
www.ti.com
SPRS523F – NOVEMBER 2008 – REVISED DECEMBER 2010
8 Thermal/Mechanical Data
Table 8-1 and Table 8-2 show the thermal data. See Section 6.5 for more information on thermal design
considerations.
The mechanical package diagrams that follow the tables reflect the most current released mechanical data
available for the designated devices.
Table 8-1. Thermal Model 38-Pin DA Results
AIR FLOW
PARAMETER
0 lfm
150 lfm
250 lfm
500 lfm
qJA [°C/W] High k PCB
70.1
56.4
53.9
50.2
ΨJT [°C/W]
0.34
0.61
0.74
0.98
ΨJB
32.5
32.1
31.7
31.1
qJC
12.8
qJB
33
Table 8-2. Thermal Model 48-Pin PT Results
AIR FLOW
PARAMETER
0 lfm
150 lfm
250 lfm
500 lfm
qJA [°C/W] High k PCB
64
50.4
48.2
45
ΨJT [°C/W]
0.56
0.94
1.1
1.38
ΨJB
30.1
28.7
28.4
28
qJC
13.6
qJB
30.6
Thermal/Mechanical Data
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Link(s): TMS320F28027 TMS320F28026 TMS320F28023 TMS320F28022 TMS320F28021
TMS320F28020 TMS320F280200
Copyright © 2008–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
123
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
13-Jun-2011
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins
Package Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/
Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
TMS320F280200DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F280200DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F280200PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F280200PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28020DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28020DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28020PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28020PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28021DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28021DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28021PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28021PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28022DAQ
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28022DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28022DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28022PTQ
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28022PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
Addendum-Page 1
Samples
(Requires Login)
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
Orderable Device
13-Jun-2011
Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins
Package Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/
Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
TMS320F28022PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
250
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023DAQ
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023PTQ
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28023PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026DAQ
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026DATR
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
2000
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026PTQ
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28026PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027DAQ
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027DAS
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027DAT
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
40
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027DATR
ACTIVE
TSSOP
DA
38
2000
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
Addendum-Page 2
Samples
(Requires Login)
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
Orderable Device
13-Jun-2011
Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins
Package Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/
Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
TMS320F28027PTQ
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027PTS
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
TMS320F28027PTT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PT
48
1
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1 YEAR
Samples
(Requires Login)
(1)
The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 3
MECHANICAL DATA
MTQF003A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996
PT (S-PQFP-G48)
PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK
0,27
0,17
0,50
36
0,08 M
25
37
24
48
13
0,13 NOM
1
12
5,50 TYP
7,20
SQ
6,80
9,20
SQ
8,80
Gage Plane
0,25
0,05 MIN
1,45
1,35
Seating Plane
1,60 MAX
0°– 7°
0,75
0,45
0,10
4040052 / C 11/96
NOTES: A.
B.
C.
D.
All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
This drawing is subject to change without notice.
Falls within JEDEC MS-026
This may also be a thermally enhanced plastic package with leads conected to the die pads.
POST OFFICE BOX 655303
• DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Applications
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Computers and Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Consumer Electronics
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DLP® Products
www.dlp.com
Energy and Lighting
www.ti.com/energy
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Clocks and Timers
www.ti.com/clocks
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
Interface
interface.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Logic
logic.ti.com
Space, Avionics and Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Transportation and
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/video
RFID
www.ti-rfid.com
Wireless
www.ti.com/wireless-apps
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions
www.ti.com/lprf
TI E2E Community Home Page
e2e.ti.com
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated